Difference between revisions of "751.5 Structural Detailing Guidelines"

From Engineering_Policy_Guide
Jump to navigation Jump to search
m (→‎751.5.10 Reinforcing Steel Detailing: Per Bridge, clarification by adding "see EPG 751.37.2.1..." note to Min. Spacing - Ties... in chart)
 
(169 intermediate revisions by 3 users not shown)
Line 1: Line 1:
== 751.5.1 Vertical and Horizontal Clearance ==
+
<div style="float: right; margin: 15px; border:1px solid black; width:20%; background-color: #f2f2f2; padding:5px; border-radius:5px; box-shadow:10px 10px 5px #888888">
 +
<center><b><u>Example Bridge Plans</u></b></center>
 +
* [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Example_plans_basic.pdf Typical Prestressed Concrete Tangent Bridge]
 +
----
 +
* [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Example_plans_steel.pdf Alternate Sheets for Steel Bridges]
 +
----
 +
* [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Example_plans_curve.pdf Additional Sheets for Curved Bridges]
 +
</div>
  
===751.5.1.1 Vertical Clearance ===
+
The scope of this article is to provide preferred detailing practices for in-house structural drawings in order to reduce revisions based solely on personal preferences.
  
'''Highway Grade Separation'''
+
==751.5.1 General Detailing ==
  
The minimum vertical clearance for highway grade separations shall be the distance from the lowest point (including splice plate and bolt heads) on the bridge superstructure (including deflection from dead load and live load plus impact) to the highest point on existing lane or shoulder. The actual minimum vertical clearance for each roadway underneath the bridge shall be shown on the front sheet of the bridge plans.  
+
===751.5.1.1 Drafting Standards ===
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
!style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan ="4"|Drafting Standards Table of Contents
 +
|-
 +
|1. [[#751.5.1.1.1 CADD Levels|CADD Levels]]||2. [[#751.5.1.1.2 Line Conventions|Line Conventions]]||3. [[#751.5.1.1.3 Annotation|Annotation]]||4. [[#751.5.1.1.4 Reference Notes|Reference Notes]]
 +
|-
 +
|5. [[#751.5.1.1.5 Sections|Sections]]||6. [[#751.5.1.1.6 Hatching|Hatching]]||7. [[#751.5.1.1.7 Breaks|Breaks]]||8. [[#751.5.1.1.8 Surfaces|Surfaces]]
 +
|-
 +
|9. [[#751.5.1.1.9 Text Height|Text Height]]||10. [[#751.5.1.1.10 Number Format|Number Format]]||11. [[#751.5.1.1.11 Span Ranges|Span Ranges]]||
 +
|}
 +
</center>
 +
====751.5.1.1.1 CADD Levels ====
 +
All bridge plans shall be drawn in OpenRoads Designer (ORD) and shall have the following levels, colors and line weights:
 +
 
 +
[[image:751.5.1.1 CAD 2021.jpg|center|875px]]
 
   
 
   
'''Railroad Grade Separation'''
+
::::::Note: Colors represent line weights:
+
:::::::Color 7 magenta = Weight 0 and 1
The minimum vertical clearance for railroad grade separations shall be the distance from the lowest point (including splice plate and bolt heads) on the bridge superstructure (including deflection from dead load and live load plus impact) to the elevation of the top of the highest rail at a point on a line 6'-0" from and parallel to the centerline of the track. If the track is superelevated, the superelevation slope shall continue to the point 6'-0" from the track centerline. An elevation shall be given on the design plans at the top of the highest rail directly on line with the point of minimum vertical clearance.
+
:::::::Color 5 yellow    = Weight 2
 +
:::::::Color 4 green      = Weight 4
 +
:::::::Color 1 gray        = Weight 5
 +
:::::::Color 2 red          = Weight 7
 +
:::::::Color 8 brown    = Weight 12 (borders)
 +
::::::'''*''' Level overrides are used to print a plan sheet in black and white with some text and/or geometry printing in color. Turn on Level Overrides in View Attributes, then print the sheet in color.
  
Use an asterisk and the corresponding note (*), to designate the vertical clearance for a railroad grade separation. Detail vertical clearance as shown below and place the following note on the plans near the elevation on the front sheet.
+
====751.5.1.1.2 Line Conventions ====
 +
Reinforcing steel, except when sectioned, is shown by a single line. Centerlines are represented by a single dot between dashes. Hidden surfaces are represented by short dashed lines.
  
'''(*) Final Vertical clearance from top of rails to bottom of superstructure to be at least 23'-0”.'''
+
Construction joints are drawn using concrete object lines as shown.
 +
: [[image:751.5.1.1 joints.jpg|100px]]
  
<center>[[Image:751.5 Vertical Clearance.gif]]</center>
+
Water surfaces will be shown by broken or dashed lines as shown. A Water Level Cell is available under CADD Standards: Front Sheets.
<center>'''Vertical Clearance'''</center>
+
: [[image:751.5.1.1 water.jpg|140px]]
  
'''For traffic maintained under the structure during construction, see Office Notes Section for proper clearance notes.'''
+
Patterns representing the type of ground shall be placed under ground lines. Patterns may be placed using a cell (under CADD Standards: Front Sheets), or as area fill (under CADD Standards: Area Patterns). When using area fill, turn on Drop Pattern to prevent it from placing a line around the perimeter of the pattern. The examples shown below were placed using area fill.  
  
'''See the Design Layout for minimum clearance.'''
+
[[image:751.5.1.1 ground line.jpg|center|800xp]]
  
'''[[748.7_Bridge_Reports_and_Layouts#748.7.4.4_Grades|Minimum Vertical Clearances for Grade Separation Structures]]'''
+
====751.5.1.1.3 Annotation ====
 +
Objects are annotated with dimensions and leader notes placed as close to the object as possible, crossing a minimum number of lines, and are to be placed outside the object whenever possible.  
  
===751.5.1.2 Horizontal Clearance ===
+
Dimensions of angles between two objects shall be an arc dimension drawn with the center at the point of intersection of the objects except when 90°, then right angle square may be used.  
  
'''[[748.7_Bridge_Reports_and_Layouts#748.7.4.4_Grades|Minimum Horizontal Clearances for Grade Separation Structures]]'''
+
Dimension lines shall be normal to extension lines whenever possible.  
  
 +
If the desired text of dimension lines will not fit clearly above and below the dimension line between extension lines, the arrows shall be placed outside the extension lines with the desired text placed on one side. If it is not possible to clearly place the desired text outside the extension lines, the text may be specified using a reference note (asterisk or (1), for example) or placed away from the dimension line using a leader note with its arrow attached to the center of the dimension line.
  
'''See the Design Layout for minimum clearance.'''
+
Arrows placed inside the extension lines should have a minimum clearance of approximately one arrow length between each arrow.  
  
<center>[[Image:751.5 Horizontal Clearances.gif]]</center>
+
The leader line of leader notes should originate from the beginning or end of the text, and the text shall be left justified.  
<center>'''Horizontal Clearances'''</center>
 
  
'''(*) Indicates horizontal clearance dimension to be shown on the front sheet of the bridge plans. (See the Design Layout for minimum clearance.)'''
+
Arrows of leader notes shall typically touch the edge of the objects they point to. When designating a structural steel member, the leg the arrow points to should be the first value mentioned in the note.  
  
Horizontal clearance for railroads shall be measured from the centerline of the tracks.
+
Arrows of leader notes shall point to a tilde (~) placed inside the object when the note specifies work done to the surface of the object. A cell is available for this purpose under CADD Standards: General Annotation (<i>Tilde for Leader Notes</i>).
  
== 751.5.2 Boring Data ==
+
====751.5.1.1.4 Reference Notes ====
 +
Reference notes are used when there is insufficient space to clearly designate the required information in a dimension or leader note.
  
===751.5.2.1 Front Sheet===
+
A reference note consists of an indicator located in the details and, at some other location on the sheet, the note specifying the required information, preceded by the indicator.  
  
<center>[[Image:751.5 Plan View Boring Marker.gif]]</center>
+
Indicators shall either be asterisks without parentheses or numbers with parentheses. Numbers are recommended when more than three reference notes are required on a single sheet.  
<center>'''Plan View Boring Marker'''</center>
 
  
All available boring data locations shall be shown with the boring symbol in the plan view on the front sheet. Detail only one boring per bent on the boring data sheet and number them accordingly. Numbered borings should try to be alternated side to side. Also give all cores.
+
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
 +
|-
 +
| * ||width="50" align="center" | (1) || Used for first required reference note
 +
|-
 +
| ** || align="center" | (2) || Used for second required reference note
 +
|-
 +
| *** || align="center" | (3) || Used for third required reference note
 +
|-
 +
| || align="center" | (4) || Used for fourth required reference note
 +
|}
  
Add boring data disclaimer note to the front sheet.
+
Indicators on the same sheet shall be of sequential order without any omission in the order.  
  
===751.5.2.2 Boring Data Sheet===
+
If a reference note indicator is only required in one detail, the reference note shall either be placed near the indicator in the detail or directly below the title of the detail.  
  
<center>[[Image:751.5 Boring Data.gif]]</center>
+
If a reference note indicator is used for several details that are grouped close together, the reference note shall preferably be placed near the center of the group of details.  
<center>'''Boring Log'''</center>
 
  
 +
Multiple reference notes using asterisk indicators, when listed together, shall be in sequential order with the asterisks being right justified so the text of the notes starts at the same location.
  
(*) Indicates type of Boring only when core drill is used.
+
If a reference note indicator is used for several details that are not grouped close together, the reference note shall be placed with the General Notes on that sheet. The [https://www.modot.org/approach-slabs-app Bridge Approach Slab Standard Drawings] are a good example of this case. If the General Notes are organized into subheadings, all of the reference notes shall be listed under a Reference Notes subheading.  
  
Add boring location note to the boring data sheet:
+
When several reference notes are required on a sheet but the notes vary by detail, the reference notes shall be located under a Reference Notes heading separate from the General Notes and grouped by detail using subheadings. The [https://www.modot.org/prestressed-panels-psp Precast Prestressed Panel Standard Drawings] are a good example of this case.
 
''For location of borings, see Sheet No.    .''
 
  
== 751.5.3 Hydraulics ==
+
====751.5.1.1.5 Sections, Elevations and Detail Circles====
 +
Sections and elevations perpendicular to the stationing are typically shown looking ahead stationing, with the exception of End Bent No.1, which is shown looking back stationing.
  
The following Tables for hydrologic and basic flood data are required on all bridge structures (stream crossings) and all standard box culverts. The hydrologic and basic flood data shall be given on the Design Layout.
+
Sections and elevations along (parallel to) the stationing are typically shown with back stationing on the left and ahead stationing on the right.  
 
See Structural Project Manager to determine which of the following tables to be placed near the Location Sketch.
 
  
 +
The location of sections and elevations within other details shall be shown in those details by placing short thick lines just outside the limits of the object or at the limits of a part of the object. Where, for the sake of clarity, it is necessary to show the direction of the view taken, arrows may be used at the ends of these lines and at right angles thereto. A reference letter shall be placed at each of these lines or arrows with these same letters being used in the title of the section or elevation (SECTION A-A). A Section Arrow cell is available under CADD Standards: General Annotation, as well as in other categories where section arrows are often used.
  
<center>'''Hydrologic and Flood Data for Culverts'''</center>
+
Detail circles are used around a portion of a detailed object that needs to be shown enlarged for the sake of clarity. Detail circles shall be annotated using a leader note such as “Detail A” followed by a reference letter with this same letter being used in the title of the enlarged detail (DETAIL A).  
<center>[[Image:751.5 Hydrologic and Flood Data for Culverts.gif]]</center>
 
  
 +
Reference letters shall not be enclosed in quotation marks (Detail A, not Detail “A”).
  
 +
For all of the sheets pertaining to the same component of the structure (all of the End Bent No. 1 sheets), reference letters for sections and elevations shall be provided in alphabetical order as occurring on the plan sheets and reference letters for detail circles shall be provided in alphabetical order as occurring on the plan sheets.
  
<center>'''Hydrologic and Flood Data for all Stream Crossings other than culverts'''</center>
+
If possible, place the section detail, elevation detail or enlarged detail on the same sheet as the detail showing the location of such details. If this is not possible, place the details on another sheet, and refer to that sheet with a note, such as “Work this sheet with Sheet No. x.”; OR “For Detail A, see Sheet No. x”.
<center>[[Image:751.5 Hydrologic and Flood Data for all Stream Crossings other than culverts.gif]]</center>
 
  
 +
====751.5.1.1.6 Hatching====
 +
Sectional views cutting through concrete shall be hatched with the conventional dot and triangle hatching. Care shall be taken to avoid dense or crowded hatching, particularly for sections showing reinforcing steel. Use <i>Concrete Areafill</i> available in CADD Standards: Area Patterns, or use the <i>Concrete Pattern Cluster</i> cell, which is available in several categories.
  
<center>'''Hydrologic and Basic Flood Data for Culverts and Bridges'''</center>
+
Sectional views through reinforcing steel shall be shown solid. Bar size will likely need to be exaggerated for clarity. Use CADD Standard <i>Reinforcing Steel (In Section)</i>, under Geometry.
<center>[[Image:751.5 Hydrologic and Basic Flood Data for Culverts and Bridges.gif]]</center>
 
  
 +
Sectional views through structural steel shall be shown as parallel sloping line hatching. Use CADD Standard <i>Steel Hatching</i>, under Area Patterns. In special cases, for the sake of clarity, the sections through structural steel may be left open or shown solid.
  
:(1) If specified on the Design Layout. *
+
Except for special cases, all miscellaneous materials such as joint filler, castings, lead plate, etc. shall have sectional views shown hatched with light parallel lines, evenly spaced and sloped 45 degrees (preferred) to the horizontal.
:(2) Indicate the character of the drainage area as specified on the Design Layout or the Bridge Survey Report.
 
:(3) Indicate the overtopping discharge and frequency if the frequency is less than 500-year. Indicate “Greater than 500 year” if the frequency is greater than 500-year.
 
  
'''(*) If the design discharge is for 100-year flood, omit Basic Flood Data Table and insert 100 years for ((1) years).'''
+
====751.5.1.1.7 Breaks====
 +
Breaks may be used in views for sake of clarity. “Short break” lines should be drawn without excessive waving or zigzag movements, and are drawn with the same line type as the broken object. A loop of the same line type may be used in showing breaks in round objects such as columns. “Long break” lines should be drawn as a solid line with one zig-zag near the center. Multiple zig-zags may be used for greater distances. Always use the <i>Long Break & Match Lines</i> CADD Standard under Geometry, NOT the same line type as the broken object.
  
The frequency of the design discharge and the design high water elevation shall be indicated after their respective values.
+
====751.5.1.1.8 Surfaces====
 +
Sloped or curved surfaces shall not be shaded except for special cases.  
  
The frequency is often shown on the Design Layout as a subscript to the particular item, or given in parenthesis behind the item.
+
====751.5.1.1.9 Text Height ====
 +
Small text used for notes, dimensions, leader notes and tabulated data shall be 1/8 inch tall. Small bold text used for subtitles and subheadings and for bench marks shall also be 1/8 inch tall. Medium text used for titles of notes, tables and details shall be 3/16 inch tall. Large text used for sheet titles shall be 1/4 inch tall. CADD Standards: General Annotation, along with Annotation Scale, will give the correct text heights for the chosen scale.
  
Example:
+
====751.5.1.1.10 Span Ranges ====
:Q10 - 10-year frequency for discharge.
+
Bridge spans are identified by their range using parentheses and the adjacent hyphenated bent numbers. For example, Span (1-2) would define the span between the first and second bents. The order of the bent numbers correlates with the view (“Span (4-3)” if Bent 4 is on the left). Spans shall be labeled near the middle of the span directly under the overall bridge length dimension, if shown; otherwise directly under the span dimension.
:H.W. Elev. (25 Yr. Freq.)  -  25-year frequency for high water elevation.
+
 +
[[image:751.5.1.1 span.jpg|center|975px]]
  
== 751.5.4 Substructure Layout ==
+
In details, the text used for labeling spans shall be all capitalized Small Bold text. Regular text shall be used in notes, with only the first letter being capitalized (Span 2-3).
  
'''Tangent Alignment'''
+
===751.5.1.2 Weights and Measures ===
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
!style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan ="4"|Weights and Measures Table of Contents
 +
|-
 +
|1. [[#751.5.1.2.1 General|General]]||2. [[#751.5.1.2.2 Lengths|Lengths]]||3. [[#751.5.1.2.3 Series|Series]]||4. [[#751.5.1.2.4 Stationing|Stationing]]
 +
|-
 +
|5. [[#751.5.1.2.5 Elevations|Elevations]]||6. [[#751.5.1.2.6 Batter|Batter]]||7. [[#751.5.1.2.7 Slopes|Slopes]]||8. [[#751.5.1.2.8 Temperatures|Temperatures]]
 +
|}
 +
</center>
  
The following information should be used in conjunction with figure below.
+
====751.5.1.2.1 General====
 +
All weights and measures shall be in English units only. Dual units shall not be used.  
  
:(1) Lengths parallel to the centerline of the roadway
+
In notes, units shall be completely spelled out (1/2 pound, 3 inches) except in cases of very lengthy units (50 ksi, 10 cfs) and for lengths when feet and inches are both required (9’-3”).
:(2) Column spacing along the centerline of the bent
 
:(3) The side parallel to the centerline of the bents in skew diagram
 
:(4) The side parallel to the centerline of the roadway in skew diagram
 
:(5) The acute angle between the centerline of bents and the centerline of the roadway in skew diagram
 
:(6) The angle between the centerline of the bents and a line normal to the centerline of the roadway in skew diagram
 
  
The span lengths for steel and prestressed structures given in the Design Layout are horizontal dimensions. For prestressed girders, the actual girder length should be adjusted accordingly for grade.
+
In dimensions, leader notes and tabulated data, unit symbols shall be used if available, otherwise unit abbreviations shall be used.
 
'''Horizontally Curved Alignment'''
 
  
The following sketches show the form and content to be used in detailing the substructure layout for some of the most common horizontal curve situations. When situations arise where modification of these sketches becomes necessary, the sketches should be used as a guide with regards to the form and content of the modified layout.
+
When used as an adjective in a note, weights or measures shall be hyphenated with the singular form of the appropriate unit or unit abbreviations (30-pound roofing felt, 6-inch lifts).
  
Attention should be given to the fact that in all cases illustrated here, the centerline of the roadway passes through the geometric center of the intermediate bents. On occasion, particularly in the case of continuous I-Beam spans, or where the slab is not symmetrical about the centerline of the roadway, this will not happen. In these and any other cases which may cause a similar situation, dimension "d", from the intersection of the centerline of the roadway with the longitudinal centerline of the bent, to the geometric center of the bent, must be shown. All bents will be parallel unless otherwise noted on the Design Layout.
+
====751.5.1.2.2 Lengths ====
  
The following key describes the dimensions marked on the following figures in this article:
+
Lengths two feet or greater shall be specified in feet and inches. Lengths less than two feet shall be specified in inches. Inches shall be reported in fractions not decimals (3/4 inch, not 0.75 inch; 2 1/2 inches, not 2.5 inches) except in the bill of reinforcing steel. In notes, there is no need to report zero inches. A zero is required in front of fractions when both foot and inch unit symbols are being used. See the following for examples:
 +
 +
[[image:751.5.1.2 lengths.jpg|center|700px]]
  
:1 Dimension along tangent
+
In general, lengths shall be reported to the nearest 1/8 inch. Where close work is required, lengths for metals may be reported to the nearest 1/16, 1/32 or 1/64 inch. Substructure layout for horizontally curved bridges shall be reported to the nearest 1/16 inch if necessary. Haunch, deflection and camber shall be reported to the nearest 1/16 inch for steel structures, while haunch and camber shall be reported to the nearest 1/8 inch for concrete structures. Lengths for individual legs of shaped reinforcing bars shall be reported using ¼-inch increments. Lengths of straight reinforcing bars shall be reported using one-inch increments.
:2 Offset from the tangent
 
:3 Angle between chords of adjacent spans
 
:4 Chord length
 
:5 Dimension along the centerline of the median or roadway
 
:6 Angle between the centerline of the bent and the chord
 
:7 Angle between the fill face and the chord
 
:8 Angle between the fill face and a radial line
 
:9 Angle between the tangent and a chord
 
:10 Skew angle
 
:11 Dimension from the centerline of the median to the centerline of the lane in the direction of the centerline intermediate bent
 
:12 Dimension from the centerline of the median to the centerline of the lane at the fill face
 
  
'''Short Bridges on Long Chords'''
+
In notes, an attribute such as thickness shall follow the unit of measure if required for clarification. Typically, such attributes should not be required with dimensions and leader notes since clarity is obtained through the detail. See the following for examples:
  
'''Bridge Placed Parallel to the Long Chord'''
+
[[image:751.5.1.2 attribute.jpg|center|550px]]
  
When noted on the Design Layout, short bridges on small horizontal curve alignments may be detailed on a line parallel to the long chord. The intent is to simplify the bridge geometry by placing the centerline of steel or P/S beam assembly on or parallel to the long chord to the centerline of roadway curve between fill faces of end bents. In order to avoid excessive slab overhangs, the line parallel to the long chord is usually placed at one-half the mid ordinate between curve and long chord. For this situation, the outside faces of the slab, barrier, rails, and wings shall be detailed concentrically with the roadway curvature, and curb ordinates shall be furnished on the plans.
+
Lengths listed in a series shall be separated using lowercase “x” in lieu of “by”. In notes, the unit of measure shall be placed at the end of the series of the same units with plurality based on the last length. One exception is that units are always required preceding attributes. The length attribute when required shall be reported last. See the following for examples:  
 
 
It is to be noted that even for symmetrical width bridges, the location of bearings will not be symmetrical about the centerline of bents. Also, the intermediate bent caps shall be built to sufficient length on each end to accommodate the bearing offsets toward either end. See Figure below.
 
 
 
'''Bridges Placed on the Long Chord'''
 
 
 
For wide roadways and very small degrees of curvature for which the mid ordinates are 3" or less, the Design Layout may occasionally direct that the entire bridge be detailed as a tangent bridge along the long chord. For this situation, no parts of the bridge are to be curved. Details for the plan view on the front sheet of the bridge plans will be similar to examples given on the following sheets except that the centerline of bridge roadway will be on the long chord.
 
 
 
'''Coordinating Superstructure - Curve Offsets'''
 
 
 
Plans for horizontally curved bridges shall contain the slab offset detail shown in Figure below.
 
 
 
Slab offsets from chords, between the centerline of bents, shall be detailed at every 5'-0” along the chord. On circular curves, these offsets shall be spaced from the center of the chord to ensure that the largest offset is recorded.
 
 
 
'''Substructure on Tangent Alignment'''
 
 
 
<center>[[Image:751.5 Coordinating Substructure on Tangent Alignment.gif|550px]]</center>
 
<center>'''Coordinating Substructure on Tangent Alignment'''</center>
 
 
 
'''NOTE:'''The span lengths for steel and prestressed structures as given in the Design
 
Layout are horizontal dimensions. The actual girder length should be  
 
adjusted accordingly for grade.
 
 
 
'''Horizontal Curved Alignment'''
 
 
 
<center>[[Image:751.5 Dual Lane Structures Tied at Fill Face of End Bent.gif]]</center>
 
<center>'''Dual Lane Structures Tied at Fill Face of End Bent'''</center>
 
 
 
 
 
<center>[[Image:751.5 Single Lane Structure Tied at Fill Face of End Bent.gif]]</center>
 
<center>'''Single Lane Structure Tied at Fill Face of End Bent'''</center>
 
 
 
 
 
<center>[[Image:751.5 Dual Lane Structure Tied at Intersection.gif]]</center>
 
<center>'''Dual Lane Structure Tied at Intersection'''</center>
 
 
 
 
 
<center>[[Image:751.5 Single Lane Structure Tied at Intersection.gif]]</center>
 
<center>'''Single Lane Structure Tied at Intersection'''</center>
 
 
 
 
 
'''Short Bridges on Long Chords'''
 
 
 
<center>[[Image:751.5 Square and Symmetrical Roadway and Spans.gif]]</center>
 
<center>'''Square and Symmetrical Roadway and Spans'''</center>
 
 
 
 
 
<center>[[Image:751.5 Square and Unsymmetrical Roadway, Symmetrical Spans.gif]]</center>
 
<center>'''Square and Unsymmetrical Roadway, Symmetrical Spans'''</center>
 
 
 
 
 
<center>[[Image:751.5 Skewed and Symmetrical Roadway and Spans.gif]]</center>
 
<center>'''Skewed and Symmetrical Roadway and Spans'''</center>
 
 
 
 
 
'''Slab Offsets for Curved Bridges'''
 
 
 
<center>[[Image:751.5 Plan of Slab Showing Curve Ordinates.gif]]</center>
 
<center>'''Plan of Slab Showing Curve Ordinates'''</center>
 
 
 
== 751.5.5 Front Sheet Misc. Details ==
 
 
 
'''Bench Mark'''
 
 
A bench mark in the vicinity of the bridge shall be provided on the front sheet and shall be located just above the title block as shown below in the following figure.
 
 
 
<center>[[Image:751.5 Bench Mark.gif]]</center>
 
<center>'''Bench Mark'''</center>
 
 
 
'''Location Sketch'''
 
 
 
A location sketch shall be provided on the front sheet of all bridge structures including box culverts and retaining walls. The location sketch may be eliminated on grade separation structures except where payment is made for removal of an existing structure or a congested area is involved such as a series of ramps, extended slope protection etc.  When the location sketch is eliminated, place the north arrow near the plan view on the front sheet.
 
 
   
 
   
The location sketch for stream crossings should show the outline of the stream channel at the bridge site. The name of the stream should be given and the direction of flow indicated by an arrow on which is written the word "Flow". Any required channel change should be shown and labeled "Proposed Channel Change" and reference made to the road plans.
+
[[image:751.5.1.2 series.jpg|center|550px]]
  
The centerline of the roadway should be shown and noted. The beginning station and outline of the new bridge should be shown and the new bridge labeled "Proposed Structure". The existing bridge, if any, should be shown and labeled "Existing Structure", and if it is a state bridge that is to be removed the bridge number shall be indicated in the location sketch. Place the north arrow near the Location Sketch.  
+
[[image:751.5.1.2 multi line.jpg|center|500px]]
  
Where structures are located on or within 150 feet of horizontal curves show complete curve data in the Location Sketch.
+
====751.5.1.2.3 Series ====
 +
A dimension line shall be used to designate a series of items such as reinforcing bars or piles. The dimension line shall be placed between the outside limits of the series and the series designated as follows:
  
'''Standard Plan Sheets'''
+
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
! colspan ="3"|Designation of a Series of Items
 +
|-
 +
!Method!! When to Use!! Example
 +
|-
 +
|Quantity Only || align="left"|small quantity clearly shown and equally distributed across the entire width of the member ||4-#7-H10
 +
|-
 +
|rowspan="3"|Quantity and Spacing Together||align="left"| exact spacing required ||5 Piles @ 5'-9" cts.
 +
|-
 +
|align="left"|start and end location fixed and the actual spacing of the required quantity is slightly less than a desired spacing || 8-#6-H19 @ abt. 8" cts.
 +
|-
 +
|align="left"|start and end location fixed and the actual spacing of the required quantity is not close to a desired spacing || | |__<u>12-#6-D20</u>__|<br/>(Equally spaced)
 +
|-
 +
|Quantity & Spacing Separate||align="left"| series has variable spacing||width="260" | |__<u>16-#5-K1 and K2</u>__|<br/>| (Spaced as shown) |<br/> |__<u>5 Spa. @ 6"|10 Spa. @ 8"</u>__|
 +
|-
 +
|Spaced with Other||align="left"| when items are to be placed at same location of another series of items that already have spacing designated|| | |__<u>11-#5-K4</u>__|<br/> (Spaced with K1 and K2)
 +
|-
 +
|Spaced Elsewhere||align="left"| when series has already been designated in another detail, useful when multiple bar marks are involved|| | |__<u>#6-U-Bars</u>__|<br/>(Spa. as shown in Elevation)
 +
|}
 +
</center>
  
Missouri Standard Plans (English Version) drawings applicable to a structure shall be made reference to on the front sheet of the bridge plans. The standard plan number(s) shall be located above the bridge number in the title block as shown in the following figure.
+
: A minimum of three items are required to be a series, otherwise designate using leader notes.
 +
: Always use the symbol @ and the abbreviations <i>cts.</i> and <i>abt.</i> All other words may be abbreviated if necessary for space in accordance with [[#751.5.1.3.1 Abbreviations|Abbreviations]].
 +
: Show all reinforcement in sectional views. Show only outside bars of the series in plan and elevation views. Show all of the items for all other series (piles in a beam cap).
  
<center>[[Image:751.5 Standard Plan Sheet Title Block.gif]]</center>
+
====751.5.1.2.4 Stationing ====
 +
Stations are points on the baseline at specified distances from the beginning point with 100 feet equaling one full station. All stationing should be carried to the nearest hundredth foot (1+50.14 identifies a location 150.14 feet from the beginning point of a route).
  
 +
====751.5.1.2.5 Elevations ====
 +
Elevations shall be designated on the plans in feet, to the nearest hundredth, except as noted below.
  
<center>'''Standard Plan Sheet Title Block'''</center>
+
Report to the nearest tenth of a foot for water surface elevations.
  
'''Information Block'''
+
Report to the nearest foot for minimum tip penetration, pile cleanout penetration, minimum galvanized penetration and estimated maximum scour depth.  (Any additional accuracy is acceptable, but not warranted.)
  
The figure below shows the SEC. / SUR. (Section or Survey number), TWP. (Township) and RGE. (Range) that is included in the information block in the upper right corner of the front sheet.
+
The foot unit is not required (Elevation 1234.98). Elevations shall be shown as close to their actual location as possible. Break lines may be used where necessary due to space limitations.
  
<center>[[Image:751.5 Information Block.gif|300px]]</center>
+
====751.5.1.2.6 Batter ====
 +
Batter is used to express the slight slope built into structural elements, such as piles, that are typically built vertical. Batter is reported by the horizontal component in inches per 12 inches vertically (Batter 2” per 12”).
  
 +
====751.5.1.2.7 Slopes ====
 +
Slopes are expressed in non-dimensional ratios. The horizontal component shall always be shown first followed by the vertical component, separated by a colon. The horizontal component is unitary for slopes greater than 45 degrees and the vertical component is unitary for slopes less than 45 degrees. The components in a slope ratio must be of identical units. Slopes shall be specified “(Normal)” if perpendicular to a skewed member.
 +
[[image:751.5.1.2 slopes.jpg|center|400px]]
  
<center>'''Information Block'''</center>
+
====751.5.1.2.8 Temperatures ====
 +
Temperatures are expressed using the Fahrenheit scale. Specific values of temperatures and ranges of temperatures shall be followed by the degree symbol and the Fahrenheit abbreviation. Temperature tolerances need only show the degree symbol (the temperature shall not be less than 40°F ±10°).
  
'''Construction Change Details'''
+
===751.5.1.3 Grammar and Punctuation===
  
When the plans require changing after the bridge has been let the existing information must be kept on the plans. The changes shall be shown with details similar to the following figure.
+
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan ="4" | Grammar and Punctuation Table of Contents
 +
|-
 +
| 1. [[#751.5.1.3.1 Abbreviations & Acronyms|Abbreviations & Acronyms]] || 2. [[#751.5.1.3.2 Symbols|Symbols]] || 3. [[#751.5.1.3.3 Capitalization|Capitalization]] || 4. [[#751.5.1.3.4 Plurality|Plurality]]
 +
|-
 +
| 5. [[#751.5.1.3.5 Verb Tense|Verb Tense]] || 6. [[#751.5.1.3.6 Punctuation|Punctuation]] || 7. [[#751.5.1.3.7 Nomenclature|Nomenclature]] ||
 +
|}
 +
</center>
  
 +
====751.5.1.3.1 Abbreviations & Acronyms ====
 +
Care shall be taken to avoid the extravagant use of abbreviations.
  
<center>[[Image:751.5 Construction Change Details.gif]]</center>
+
Titles may use abbreviations only where required by lack of space.
  
 +
'''Pay Items:''' The following units shall be used for pay items in quantity tables:
 +
{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
 +
|-
 +
|width="120"| cu. foot||width="120"| each||width="120"| linear foot||width="120"| pound||width="120"| sq. yard
 +
|-
 +
|cu. yard|| gallon|| lump sum|| sq. foot|| ton
 +
|}
  
<center>'''Construction Change Details'''</center>
+
'''Leader Notes, Dimensions and Tabulated Data:''' Approved abbreviations may be used for dimensions, leader notes and tabulated data, except the abbreviated “typ.”, “min.” and “max.” shall always be used.
  
'''Curve Data'''
+
'''Notes:''' In general, abbreviations shall not be used in notes. Some exceptions include:
  
All curve data of roadways that are going over or under the bridge shall be provided on the front sheet.
+
:*sections of the standard specifications (Sec)
 +
:*acronyms (ASTM)
 +
:*lengthy units (psi or ksi, lb/sf)
 +
:*specific temperature (40°F)
 +
:*specific size other than reinforcement (No. 4 sieve)
 +
:*specific number (Intermediate Bent No. 2)
 +
:*where space is very limited
  
'''Filled Joint Detail'''
+
Abbreviations of units of measure are written without periods, with the exception of inches since it could be confused with the preposition.
  
When joint filler is indicated on the plans, include Section number of Missouri Standard Specifications indicated below.
+
Units raised to a power should be reserved for tabulated data and leader notes.  
  
:'''Sec 1057''' Preformed Sponge Rubber Expansion and Partition Joint Filler:
+
The following list of abbreviations and acronyms shall be observed where applicable. Abbreviations should be capitalized if shown that way below; otherwise capitalization shall be in accordance with [[#751.5.1.3.3 Capitalization|Capitalization]]. Unless otherwise shown below, abbreviations shall always use the singular form.
:*Superstructure
 
:*Pedestrian Structures
 
:*Retaining Walls
 
  
 
+
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
:'''Sec 1057''' Preformed Fiber Expansion Joint Material:
+
|+
:*Culverts
+
| about || abt.
:*Slope Protection
+
|-
:*P/S Panels
+
| abutment || abut.
 
+
|-
 
+
| American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials || AASHTO
<center>[[Image:751.5 Filled Joint Detail.gif|450px]]</center>
+
|-
 
+
| angle || ang.
<center>'''Filled Joint Detail'''</center>
+
|-
 
+
| approach || appr.
'''Rock Blanket - Revetment'''
+
|-
 
+
| approximately || approx.
When a rock blanket is specified on the Profile Sheet of layout file it should be shown in the General Elevation of the front sheet. Permanent Erosion Control Geotextile shall also be noted if they are needed. The following figure shows common rock blanket details.  See [[751.1 Preliminary Design#751.1.2.14 Bridges Over Railroads|EPG 751.1.2.14 Bridges over Railroad]] for criteria specific to bridges over railroads.
+
|-
 
+
| approved || appv.
<center>[[Image:751.5 Rock Blanket Detail.gif]]</center>
+
|-
<center>'''Rock Blanket Detail'''</center>
+
| alternate or alternately || alt.
 
+
|-
Upper Elev. of Rock Blanket on spill slope need not be higher than that for the side slope.
+
| area || ar.
 
+
|-
{| border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" align="center"
+
| American Society for Testing and Materials || ASTM
 
+
|-
|Valign="top"|Note:||When Permanent Erosion Control Geotextile is specified on profile sheet it should be noted in the GENERAL ELEVATION. Outlets may be used over Permanent Erosion Control Geotextile material. See Bridge Plans for type of curb to be used.
+
| anchor bolt || A.B.
 +
|-
 +
| April || Apr.
 +
|-
 +
| asphalt || asph.
 +
|-
 +
| August || Aug.
 +
|-
 +
| avenue || ave.
 +
|-
 +
| average || avg.
 +
|-
 +
| height="10" | ||
 +
|-
 +
| baluster || bal.
 +
|-
 +
| backfill || bkfl.
 +
|-
 +
| beam || bm.
 +
|-
 +
| bearing || brg.
 +
|-
 +
| beginning || beg.
 +
|-
 +
| bench mark || B.M.
 +
|-
 +
| bent || bt.
 +
|-
 +
| between || btwn.
 +
|-
 +
| bevel || bev.
 +
|-
 +
| bituminous || bit.
 +
|-
 +
| bottom || bott.
 +
|-
 +
| bracket || brkt.
 +
|-
 +
| bridge || br. (or BR, when referring to Bridge Division)
 +
|-
 +
| building || bldg.
 +
|-
 +
| height="10" | ||
 +
|-
 +
| cantilever || cant.
 +
|-
 +
| carbon fiber reinforced polymer || CFRP
 +
|-
 +
| cast-in-place || CIP
 +
|-
 +
| cast iron || c.i.
 +
|-
 +
| center || ctr.
 +
|-
 +
| centers (spacing, e.g. #4 @ 6” cts.) || cts.
 +
|-
 +
| Central District || CD
 +
|-
 +
| Central Office || CO
 +
|-
 +
| channel (stream) || chan.
 +
|-
 +
| clear or clearance || cl.
 +
|-
 +
| closed-ended cast in place (piles) || CECIP
 +
|-
 +
| collision (wall) || coll.
 +
|-
 +
| column || col.
 +
|-
 +
| concrete || conc.
 +
|-
 +
| concrete minimum compressive strength || f’c
 +
|-
 +
| concrete minimum compressive strength at initial loading || f’ci
 +
|-
 +
| Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute || CRSI
 +
|-
 +
| connection || conn.
 +
|-
 +
| construction || const.
 +
|-
 +
| continuous || cont.
 +
|-
 +
| corrugated || corr.
 +
|-
 +
| counterfort || ctft.
 +
|-
 +
| countersunk || ctsk.
 +
|-
 +
| county || co.
 +
|-
 +
| creek || cr.
 +
|-
 +
| creosoted || creo.
 +
|-
 +
| cubic foot (unit of measure) || cf or ft<sup>3</sup>
 +
|-
 +
| cubic inch (unit of measure) || cu. in. or in<sup>3</sup>
 +
|-
 +
| cubic yard (unit of measure) || cy or yd<sup>3</sup>
 +
|-
 +
| cubic foot per second (unit of measure)|| cfs
 +
|-
 +
| culvert || culv.
 +
|-
 +
| height="10"| ||
 +
|-
 +
| dead load (loading) || DL
 +
|-
 +
| December || Dec.
 +
|-
 +
| deck girder || d.g.
 +
|-
 +
| degree (angular unit of measure)(temperature range unit of measure) || deg
 +
|-
 +
| department || dept.
 +
|-
 +
| design || des.
 +
|-
 +
| design flood (elevation) || D.F.
 +
|-
 +
| detail || det.
 +
|-
 +
| diagram || diag.
 +
|-
 +
| diameter || dia.
 +
|-
 +
| diameter (shown as dimension) || D.
 +
|-
 +
| ditto (steel details) || do.
 +
|-
 +
| division || div.
 +
|-
 +
| double || dbl.
 +
|-
 +
| drawing || dwg.
 +
|-
 +
| File Extension for a CADD file in ORD || .dgn
 +
|-
 +
| height="10"| ||
 +
|-
 +
| each || ea.
 +
|-
 +
| east || E
 +
|-
 +
| eastbound || EB
 +
|-
 +
|eastbound lane|| EBL
 +
|-
 +
|elevation ||elev.
 +
|-
 +
|embedment, or embedded ||embed.
 +
|-
 +
|engineer ||engr.
 +
|-
 +
|equal or equally ||eq.
 +
|-
 +
|estimate or estimated|| est.
 +
|-
 +
|excavation|| exc.
 +
|-
 +
|existing|| exist.
 +
|-
 +
|expansion ||exp.
 +
|-
 +
|exterior|| ext.
 +
|-
 +
| height="10"| ||
 +
|-
 +
|fabricated|| fab.
 +
|-
 +
|Fahrenheit (temperature scale)|| F
 +
|-
 +
|far side (steel details)|| f.s.
 +
|-
 +
| February || Feb.
 +
|-
 +
| federal || fed.
 +
|-
 +
| fiber reinforced polymer || FRP
 +
|-
 +
| fill face (culvert details) || f.f.
 +
|-
 +
|fixed ||fix.
 +
|-
 +
|flange|| flg.
 +
|-
 +
|floor|| fl.
 +
|-
 +
|foot (unit of measure)|| ft
 +
|-
 +
|footing ||ftg.
 +
|-
 +
|  height="10"| ||
 +
|-
 +
|gallon (unit of measure)|| gal
 +
|-
 +
|galvanize|| galv.
 +
|-
 +
|gauge|| ga.
 +
|-
 +
|girder|| gdr.
 +
|-
 +
| glass fiber reinforced polymer || GFRP
 +
|-
 +
| grade || gr.
 +
|-
 +
| height="10" | ||
 +
|-
 +
| head || hd.
 +
|-
 +
| hexagonal || hex.
 +
|-
 +
|high strength (for bolts)|| H.S.
 +
|-
 +
|high water (elevation) ||H.W.
 +
|-
 +
|highway ||hwy.
 +
|-
 +
|horizontal|| horiz.
 +
|-
 +
|hour (time unit of measure)|| hr
 +
|-
 +
| height="10"| ||
 +
|-
 +
|impact (loading)|| IM
 +
|-
 +
|inch (unit of measure) ||in.
 +
|-
 +
|include ||incl.
 +
|-
 +
|inner diameter (shown as a dimension) ||I.D.
 +
|-
 +
|interior or intermediate ||int.
 +
|-
 +
| height="10"| ||
 +
|-
 +
|January|| Jan.
 +
|-
 +
|joint|| jt.
 +
|-
 +
|July|| Jul.
 +
|-
 +
|June|| Jun.
 +
|-
 +
| height="10"| ||
 +
|-
 +
| Kansas City District || KC
 +
|-
 +
|kilopound (unit of measure)|| kip
 +
|-
 +
|kilopound per cubic feet (unit of measure)|| kcf
 +
|-
 +
|kilopound per square feet (unit of measure)|| ksf
 +
|-
 +
|kilopound per square inch (unit of measure)|| ksi
 +
|-
 +
| height="10"| ||
 +
|-
 +
|lateral (steel details)|| lat.
 +
|-
 +
|left ||lt.
 +
|-
 +
|length ||lgth.
 +
|-
 +
|linear or lineal (feet, inches)|| lin.
 +
|-
 +
|linear foot (unit of measure)|| lf
 +
|-
 +
|live load (loading)|| LL
 +
|-
 +
| Load Factor Design || LFD
 +
|-
 +
| Load & Resistance Factor Design || LRFD
 +
|-
 +
| longitudinal || long.
 +
|-
 +
| low water (elevation) || L.W.
 +
|-
 +
| height="10"| ||
 +
|-
 +
| March || Mar.
 +
|-
 +
| maximum || max.
 +
|-
 +
| mechanical bar splice|| MBS
 +
|-
 +
| median || med.
 +
|-
 +
| memorandum || memo.
 +
|-
 +
| Microcomposite Multistructural Formable Steel</br>(high tensile strength rebar) || MMFX
 +
|-
 +
| mile (unit of measure) || mi
 +
|-
 +
| miles per hour (unit of measure) || mph
 +
|-
 +
| minimum || min.
 +
|-
 +
| minute (angular unit of measure) (time unit of measure) || min
 +
|-
 +
| miscellaneous || misc.
 +
|-
 +
| Missouri Highway & Transportation Commission || MHTC
 +
|-
 +
| Missouri Highway & Transportation Department || MHTD (No longer used. Now MoDOT)
 +
|-
 +
| height="10"| ||
 +
|-
 +
| near side (steel details) || n.s.
 +
|-
 +
| nominal || nom.
 +
|-
 +
| north || N
 +
|-
 +
| northbound || NB
 +
|-
 +
| northbound lane || NBL
 +
|-
 +
| northeast (or Northeast District) || NE
 +
|-
 +
| northwest (or Northwest District) || NW
 +
|-
 +
|not applicable or not available (table data) ||N/A
 +
|-
 +
|November|| Nov.
 +
|-
 +
|number ||no.
 +
|-
 +
| number (specific number, e.g. Sheet No. 3) || No.
 +
|-
 +
| height="10" | ||  
 +
|-
 +
| octagonal || oct.
 +
|-
 +
| October || Oct.
 +
|-
 +
| open-ended cast in place (piles) || OECIP
 +
|-
 +
| optional || opt.
 +
|-
 +
| ordinary high water (elevation) || O.H.W.
 +
|-
 +
| ordinate || ord.
 +
|-
 +
| outer diameter (shown as a dimension) || O.D.
 +
|-
 +
| overflow || o.f.
 +
|-
 +
| overhead || o.h.
 +
|-
 +
| height="10" | ||
 +
|-
 +
| pair (reinforcement call out, 6 Pr. #7-U21) || pr.
 +
|-
 +
| paragraph || par.
 +
|-
 +
| perpendicular || perp.
 +
|-
 +
| piece (for partial structural shapes) || pc.
 +
|-
 +
| plate || pl.
 +
|-
 +
| point || pt.
 +
|-
 +
| polyvinyl chloride (for conduit and pipes) || PVC
 +
|-
 +
| portable document format (file extension) || .pdf
 +
|-
 +
| pound (unit of measure)(do not use #) || lb
 +
|-
 +
| pound per cubic feet (unit of measure) || pcf
 +
|-
 +
| pound per square inch (unit of measure) || psi
 +
|-
 +
| prestressed || P/S
 +
|-
 +
| profile || pr.
 +
|-
 +
| project || proj.
 +
|-
 +
| height="10" | ||
 +
|-
 +
| radius || rad.
 +
|-
 +
| radius (shown as a dimension) || R.
 +
|-
 +
| railroad || R.R.
 +
|-
 +
| railway || rlwy.
 +
|-
 +
| rehabilitate or rehabilitated || rehab.
 +
|-
 +
| reinforcing or reinforcement || reinf.
 +
|-
 +
| retaining (wall) || ret.
 +
|-
 +
| right || rt.
 +
|-
 +
| river || r.
 +
|-
 +
| roadway || rdwy.
 +
|-
 +
| route || rte.
 +
|-
 +
| rubber compound || rub. comp.
 +
|-
 +
| height="10" |  ||
 +
|-
 +
| second (unit of measure) || s
 +
|-
 +
| section || sec.
 +
|-
 +
| section of MO standard and supplemental specifications || Sec
 +
|-
 +
| September || Sep.
 +
|-
 +
| shear connector || S.C.
 +
|-
 +
| sheet || sh.
 +
|-
 +
| shoulder || shldr.
 +
|-
 +
| south || S
 +
|-
 +
| southbound || SB
 +
|-
 +
| southbound lane || SBL
 +
|-
 +
| southeast (or Southeast District) || SE
 +
|-
 +
| southwest (or Southwest District) || SW
 +
|-
 +
| space(s), spacing or spaced || spa.
 +
|-
 +
| specification || spec.
 +
|-
 +
| square || sq.
 +
|-
 +
| square foot (unit of measure) || sf or ft<sup>2</sup>
 +
|-
 +
| square inch (unit of measure) || sq in. or in<sup>2</sup>
 +
|-
 +
| square mile (unit of measure) || sq mi or mi<sup>2</sup>
 +
|-
 +
| square yard (unit of measure) || sy or yd<sup>2</sup>
 +
|-
 +
| standard || std.
 +
|-
 +
| station || sta.
 +
|-
 +
| stay-in-place || SIP
 +
|-
 +
| steel minimum yield strength || fy
 +
|-
 +
| St. Louis District || SL
 +
|-
 +
| stream face (culvert details) || s.f.
 +
|-
 +
| street || st.
 +
|-
 +
| stringer || str.
 +
|-
 +
| structural || struc.
 +
|-
 +
| structural liaison engineer (consultants’ contact person) || SLE
 +
|-
 +
| structural project manager || SPM
 +
|-
 +
| substructure || substr.
 +
|-
 +
| superelevation || s.e.
 +
|-
 +
| superstructure || superstr.
 +
|-
 +
| symmetrical || symm.
 +
|-
 +
| height="10" |  ||
 +
|-
 +
| tangent || tan.
 +
|-
 +
| through || thru
 +
|-
 +
| thread || thd.
 +
|-
 +
| transportation project manager (at district) || TPM
 +
|-
 +
| transverse || trans.
 +
|-
 +
| truss || tr.
 +
|-
 +
| typical || typ.
 +
|-
 +
| height="10" | ||
 +
|-
 +
| use in place || U.I.P.
 +
|-
 +
| height="10" |  ||
 +
|-
 +
| variable || var.
 +
|-
 +
| vertical || vert.
 +
|-
 +
| vertical curve (length in curve data) || V.C.
 +
|-
 +
| vertical point of intersection (curve data) || VPI
 +
|-
 +
| height="10" | ||
 +
|-
 +
| weight || wt.
 +
|-
 +
| welded wire reinforcement || WWR
 +
|-
 +
| west || W
 +
|-
 +
| westbound || WB
 +
|-
 +
| westbound lane || WBL
 +
|-
 +
| widen or widening || wid.
 +
|-
 +
| with || w/
 
|-
 
|-
|Valign="top"|(*)||12" between top of spill slope and lowest beam depth for Girder Bridges and 24" for Concrete Slab Bridges.
+
| without || w/o
 
|-
 
|-
|Valign="top"|(**)||Elev. at top of Rock Blanket for side slopes shall be the highest of the following:
+
| wrought iron || w.i.
 
|-
 
|-
| ||12" above High Water Elevation (For 500-Yr. Freq.) or
+
| height="10" |  ||
 
|-
 
|-
| ||24" above High Water Elevation (For 100-yr. Freq.)
+
| yard (unit of measure) || yd
 
|-
 
|-
|Valign="top"|(***)||A Rock Blanket Apron should extend from the toe of the Spill Slope into the bridge waterway a distance equal to twice the Flow Depth in the overbank area near the embankment, but need not exceed 25 feet.
+
| year (unit of measure) || yr
 
|-
 
|-
|Valign="top"|(****)||See Design Layout for maximum slope of spill fill (Maximum allowable  spill fill slope is determined by Construction and Materials Division as specified in the Soils Survey for each project).
 
 
|}
 
|}
  
'''Railroad Crossings'''
+
====751.5.1.3.2 Symbols ====
 +
In general, symbols shall not be used in notes. Some exceptions include:
 +
:*the # symbol when calling out bar sizes (#4)
 +
:* measurements with both feet and inches (2’-0¾”)
 +
:* where space is very limited
  
The following figure shows common railroad crossing details.
 
  
<center>[[Image:751.5 Railroad crossing details.gif]]</center>
+
Symbols shall be used in dimensions, leader notes and tabulated data for noting reinforcing bars, structural steel shapes, bolts, welding, lengths, angles, etc. Unit symbols shall not be omitted where they apply, except in authorized designation of structural steel shapes, e.g. HP10x42.
<center>'''Railroad Crossings'''</center>
 
  
{| border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" align="center"
+
The following list of approved symbols shall be observed where applicable and are shown with the required spacing. Welding symbols are not shown below but shall be in accordance with American Welding Society (AWS) and with [[#751.5.9.3.1. Welding|EPG 751.5.9.3.1 Welding]].
 +
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
!style="background:#BEBEBE" |Word!!style="background:#BEBEBE" |Symbol !!style="background:#BEBEBE" |No Space Before/After<br/>(Example) !!style="background:#BEBEBE" |Special Character<br/>Code
 +
|-
 +
|and||align="center"|&||align="center"|NA||align="center"|NA
 +
|-
 +
|angle (generic)||align="center"|∠||align="center"|NA (5/8''"'' ∠)||align="center"|\8736
 +
|-
 +
|angle (structural designation)||align="center"|L||align="center"|after (L5x3½x¾) ||align="center"|NA
 +
|-
 +
|asterisk||align="center"|*||align="center"|NA||align="center"|\8727
 +
|-
 +
|at (spacing)||align="center"|@||align="center"|NA||align="center"|NA
 +
|-
 +
|baseline||align="center"|[[image:751.5.1.3.2 baseline.jpg|16px]]||align="center"|NA||align="center"|\0163
 +
|-
 +
|centerline||align="center"|[[image:751.5.1.3.2 centerline.jpg|15px]]||align="center"|NA||align="center"|\0161
 +
|-
 +
|degree (angular unit of measure)||align="center"|°||align="center"|before (20°)||align="center"|\0176
 +
|-
 +
|degree (temperature)||align="center"|°||align="center"|before & after (5°F)||align="center"|\0176
 +
|-
 +
|diameter||align="center"|Ø||align="center"|before (¾''"''Ø)||align="center"|\11585
 +
|-
 +
|equal||align="center"|=||align="center"|NA||align="center"|NA
 +
|-
 +
|inch||align="center"|''"''||align="center"|before (3''"'')||align="center"|NA
 +
|-
 +
|foot||align="center"|'' ' ''||align="center"|before (5''ʹ'')||align="center"|NA
 +
|-
 +
|minus (subtraction)||align="center"| - ||align="center"|NA||align="center"|NA
 +
|-
 +
|minus (negative)(tolerance)||align="center"| - ||align="center"|after (-15°)||align="center"|NA
 
|-
 
|-
|valign="top" align="right"|(*)||width="350pt" valign="top" align="left"|Final vertical clearance from top of rails to bottom of superstructure shall be at least 23'-0". Rail elevations should be verified in the field prior to construction to determine if the final vertical clearance shown shall be obtained.
+
|minute (angular unit of measure)||align="center"|'' ʹ ''||align="center"|before (15''ʹ'')||align="center"|NA
|rowspan="3"|[[Image:751.5 railroad minimum construction clearances.gif]]
 
 
|-
 
|-
|valign="top" align="right"|(**)||width="350pt" valign="top" align="left"|Elevation of top of collision wall shall be determined on Design Layout.
+
|number (size classification)||align="center"| #||align="center"|after (#4 bar)||align="center"|NA
 
|-
 
|-
|valign="top" align="right"|(***)||width="350pt" valign="top" align="left"|Add 1.5 in. per degree of track curvature to the horizontal clearance distance of 12'-0".  (MoDOT's R.R. Liaison will obtain degree of curvature from R.R.)
+
|plate||align="center"|[[image:751.5.1.3.2 plate.jpg|16px]]||align="center"|NA||align="center"|\0162
 
|-
 
|-
!colspan="2"| &nbsp; ||Minimum Construction Clearances
+
|plus (addition)||align="center"| + ||align="center"|NA||align="center"|NA
 
|-
 
|-
|colspan="2"| &nbsp; ||align="center"|(Normal to Railroad)<br/>(Not to scale)
+
|plus (tolerance)||align="center"| + ||align="center"|after (+10%)||align="center"|NA
 +
|-
 +
|plus or minus (approximation)||align="center"| ± ||align="center"|before (2''"''±)||align="center"|\0177
 +
|-
 +
|plus or minus (tolerance)||align="center"| ± ||align="center"|after (±15°)||align="center"|\0177
 +
|-
 +
|per (unit combinations)||align="center"| / ||align="center"|before & after (lb/ft)||align="center"|NA
 +
|-
 +
|percent||align="center"|%||align="center"|before (15%)||align="center"|NA
 +
|-
 +
|second (angular unit of measure)||align="center"|'' " ''||align="center"|before (30''"'')||align="center"|NA
 
|}
 
|}
 +
</center>
  
== 751.5.6 General Detailing ==
+
====751.5.1.3.3 Capitalization ====
 +
The following capitalization rules shall be used except notes for design specifications, loadings and unit stresses shall match as shown in [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#A1. Design Specifications, Loadings & Unit Stresses and Standard Plans|EPG 751.50, A1. Design Specifications, Loadings & Unit Stresses and Standard Plans]].
 +
 +
[[image:751.5.1.3.3 capitalization 2017.jpg|center|750px]]
  
'''Levels'''
+
Titles and subtitles of details and sheet titles shall be in all capitals, including bracketed information, except for units of measure, e.g. PART SECTION (TYPICAL).
  
All Cadd drawings shall be drawn in MicroStation and shall have the following levels, colors and line weights.
+
Titles, subtitles and headings of notes and tables and items in tables (except for quantity tables) shall have all nouns, pronouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs and prepositions capitalized except for units of measure. The capitalization of the pay items in quantity tables shall be in accordance with [[751.6 General Quantities|EPG 751.6 General Quantities]].
  
# Concrete object lines (color 1 gray, weight 5)
+
Units of measurement shall always be lowercase except for Fahrenheit (F).
# Reinforcing steel (color 4 green, weight 4)
 
# Structural steel object lines (color 4 green, weight 4)
 
# Hidden lines (dashed 2, color 4 green, weight 4)
 
# Centerlines (centerline 4, color 5 yellow, weight 2)
 
# Dimensions (color 5 yellow, weight 2)
 
# Leadered notes (color 5 yellow, weight 2)
 
# Small text (color 5 yellow, weight 2)
 
# Medium text (color 1 gray, weight 5)
 
# Large text (color 2 red, weight 7)
 
# Existing structure (lt. dash 1, color 5 yellow, weight 2)
 
# Cells (variable colors and weights)
 
# Area fill (color 7 magenta, weight 1)
 
# Section lines (color 2 red, weight 7)
 
# Quantity boxes and tables (variable colors and weights)
 
# Ground line (color 1 gray, weight 5)
 
# Annotations (No color or weight required)
 
# Break and match lines (color 5 yellow, weight 2)
 
# Misc. object lines (color 5 yellow, weight 2)
 
# Points (color 7 magenta, weight 8)
 
  
'''Conventions'''
+
====751.5.1.3.4 Plurality ====
 +
The following words are typically used as noncount nouns in singular form. When these words describe a quantity of items then the item shall be made plural, e.g., two material samples shall be taken or three pipe units shall be tested.
  
Reinforcing steel, except when sectioned, is shown by a single line. Centerlines are represented by a single dot between dashes. Hidden surfaces are represented by short dashed lines.
+
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
!style="background:#BEBEBE" |Noncount Nouns
 +
|-
 +
|guardrail
 +
|-
 +
|material (Exception: Materials Division)
 +
|-
 +
|pile
 +
|-
 +
|pipe
 +
|}
 +
</center>
  
Construction joints are represented using the miscellaneous object lines level as shown below:
+
For consistency, when referring to a group of items, the name is pluralized and not the indicator. See the examples below.
[[image:751.5.6 construction joint.jpg|center|150px]]
 
Water surfaces will be shown by broken or dashed lines as shown below.
 
  
The hatching of ground lines shall be shown as follows:
+
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
!style="background:#BEBEBE" |Correct !!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Incorrect
 +
|-
 +
|Sheets No. 1, 2 & 3|| Sheet Nos. 1, 2 & 3
 +
|-
 +
|Walls No. 1, 2 & 3|| Wall Nos. 1, 2 & 3
 +
|-
 +
|Bents No. 1, 2 & 3|| Bent Nos. 1, 2 & 3
 +
|-
 +
|}
 +
</center>
 +
<div id="When dimensions and quantities"></div>
 +
When dimensions and quantities of items are used as hyphenated adjectives (describing another object) the dimension unit or the item shall always be in singular form.
  
{| border="0" cellpadding="6" cellspacing="6" align="center" style="text-align:center;"
+
<center>
 
+
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
|[[Image:751.5 Water Line.gif]]
+
|+
|[[Image:751.5 Natural Ground Line.gif]]
+
!style="background:#BEBEBE" |Examples
|[[Image:751.5 Finished Ground Line.gif]]
+
|-
|[[Image:751.5 Rock or Shale.gif]]
+
|align="center"|4-inch hole
 
|-
 
|-
|Water Line
+
|align="center"|Three-strand cable
|Natural Ground Line
 
|Finished Ground Line
 
|Rock or Shale
 
 
|}
 
|}
 +
</center>
  
'''Miscellaneous'''
+
====751.5.1.3.5 Verb Tense ====
 +
Past tense shall be used for required work on the plans as if already completed, e.g., STAGED CONSTRUCTION as a title, not STAGE CONSTRUCTION.
  
Lines used to indicate the magnitude of angle between two straight lines shall be an arc drawn with the center at point of intersection of the two lines. Arrows and dimension lines shall touch the items or extension lines they point to. Dimension lines shall be normal to extension lines whenever possible.
+
Past tense shall also be used with verbs used as adjectives, including words describing the orientation of structures or structural components, e.g. prestressed girders or squared end precast panels.
  
'''Dimensions and Leadered Notes'''
+
Present tense shall be used for all instructions, e.g., Remove timber header when concrete pavement is placed, see end bent sheets for details.
  
Dimensions and leadered notes shall be placed as close to the detail as possible and shall cross a minimum number of lines and details.
+
====751.5.1.3.6 Punctuation ====
 
+
'''General'''
A bracket is normally not required for a multi-line note. The leader line should originate from the beginning or end of the note.
 
 
 
When designating a structural steel member, the leg the arrow points to should be the first value mentioned in the note.
 
 
 
When designating a number of parallel lines (such as reinforcing bars), a dimension line shall be used between the outside lines of the group. If the desired text will not fit clearly on the dimension line, the text may be placed away from the dimension line, and attached to the dimension line's center by an arrow. Arrowheads placed inside the extension lines should have a minimum clearance of 3/8" between the arrows.
 
 
 
'''Sections, Breaks and Curved Surfaces'''
 
 
 
'''Locating Sections '''  
 
 
 
In general, the location of all sections shall be shown by use of heavy lines placed just outside the limits of the detail or portion of detail sectioned. Where, for the sake of clarity, it is necessary to show the direction of the view taken, arrows may be used at the ends of these lines and at right angles thereto.  A reference letter shall be placed at these lines or arrows and the same letters used in the titles under sectional views. Views are normally shown looking in the direction of stationing, with the exception of End Bent No.1, which is reversed.
 
  
'''Hatching'''
+
Notes shall be written using complete punctuated sentences. Sentence fragments of explanatory or qualifying remarks marked off by parentheses may be inserted into completed punctuated sentences.
  
Sectional views cutting through concrete shall be hatched with the conventional dot and triangle or oval hatching. Care shall be taken to avoid dense or crowded hatching, particularly for sections showing reinforcing steel.
+
Leader notes and dimensions shall consist of sentence fragments. Sentence fragments are never punctuated. Use parentheses to divide separate multiple fragments, e.g., #4 Bars under bearing (6” Maximum spacing of stirrups).
  
Sectional views through reinforcing steel shall be shown solid. Sectional views through structural steel shall be shown as parallel sloping line hatching.  In special cases, for the sake of clarity, the sections through structural steel may be left open or shown solid.
+
'''Quotation Marks'''
  
Except for special cases, all miscellaneous materials such as joint filler, castings, lead plate, etc. shall have sectional views shown hatched with light parallel lines, evenly spaced and sloped 45 degrees to the horizontal.
+
Quotation marks shall only be used in instructions to quote the exact words that are to be written by the contractor, e.g. the word “RECOATED” shall be painted on the structure. Quotation marks shall not be used for emphasis and around specific items such as titles of tabulated data, pay items or section letters.
  
Breaks may be used in views for sake of clarity. All breaks should be drawn without excessive waving or zig-zag movements. A loop may be used in showing breaks in round objects such as columns.
+
'''Hyphens'''
  
Sloped or curved surfaces shall not be shaded except for special cases.
+
Hyphens, without spaces before or after the hyphen, shall be used to link two or more words or elements that act as a single idea. The following rules shall be followed.  
  
'''Lettering'''
+
:<u>Compound Adjectives Before a Noun</u>
  
All lettering shall be upper and lower case except titles, which shall be all capital letters in bold print.
+
:::Examples: cast-in-place slab, 72-hour-old concrete.
 +
:::::* But not for: slab is cast in place, concrete is 72 hours old.
 +
:::Examples: I-girder bridge, H-pile footing, R-bar shape
 +
:::::* But not for: I girders shall be…, H pile are used…, R bar shall be…
 +
:::Examples: 1/4-inch joint, one-fourth-inch joint
 +
:::::* But not for: joint is 1/4 inch, joint is one-fourth inch.
 +
:::Examples: 3/4-inch joint, three-fourth-inch joint
 +
:::::* But not for: joint is 3/4 inch, joint is three-fourths inch.
 +
:::Examples: 1 1/2-inch pipe, one-and-one-half-inch pipe.
 +
:::::* But not for: pipe is 1 1/2 inches, pipe is one and one-half inches.
 +
:::Examples: one-strand cable, three-strand cable, lot-by-lot basis, chain-link fence, hot-mix asphalt.
  
'''Text Height '''
+
:<u>Compound Numbers 21-99</u>
 +
:::Example: Twenty-two feet
  
Body text shall be 0.0104 ft. (1/8 in.) tall, titles shall be 0.0156 ft. (3/16 in.) tall and the county name shall be 0.0208 ft. (1/4 in.) tall.
+
:<u>Verbs Using Compound Nouns</u>
 +
:::Examples: water-proof surfaces, hydro-demolition deck
  
'''Dimensions'''
+
:<u>Fractions (Spelled Out)</u>
 +
:::Examples: One and five-eighths, One-third of slab
  
All details should be in English units only.  No dual dimensioning will be used. Print unit name in lower case, even those derived from a proper name except for Fahrenheit (F.).
+
:<u>Prefixes and Suffixes</u>
 +
::''Before Proper Nouns or Adjectives ''
 +
:::Example: mid-July
 +
:::::* But not: midpoint
  
Use only feet and inches for length measurements. Dimensions under 2'-0" shall be detailed as inches.
+
::''Between Duplicated Vowels ''
 +
:::Examples: re-established, pre-existing, semi-invalid
 +
:::::* But not: subbase, prestressed
  
In general, detail dimensions shall be given to the nearest 1/8". Where close work is required, dimensions for metals may be given to the nearest 1/16", 1/32" or 1/64". Deflections and haunches shall be reported to the nearest 1/16". Substructure layout for horizontally curved bridges shall be dimensioned to the nearest 1/16".  
+
::''Avoiding Confusion''
 +
:::De- (e.g., de-icing)
 +
:::::* But not: defrost
 +
:::Co- (e.g., co-pilot)
  
Nominal span lengths at the top of the front sheet shall be reported in feet and inches only.
+
::''Always With''
 +
:::Self- (e.g., self-propelled)
 +
:::-free (e.g., tack-free)
 +
:::-based (e.g., water-based)
  
The term or abbreviation for "about" shall not be used in the dimensioning of structural steel.
+
:<u>Reinforcement Callouts</u>
 +
::''In Bar Marks Between the Bar Size and Bar Designation''
 +
:::Example: #4-H100 <u>(dimensions, leader notes & notes)</u>
 +
::''Between Number Required and the Bar Mark ''
 +
:::Examples: 6-#4-H100 <u>(dimensions & leader notes)</u>
 +
::::::Six #4-H100 bars (notes)
 +
::''Between Pairs Required (Pr.) and the Bar Mark ''
 +
:::Examples: Pr.-#4-H100 <u>(dimensions & leader notes)</u>
 +
::::::Pair of #4-H100 bars (notes)
 +
::''Not Between Number Required and Pairs (Pr.)''
 +
:::Examples: 4 Pr.-#4-H100 <u>(dimensions & leader notes)</u>
 +
::::::Four pairs of #4-H100 bars (notes)
  
'''Stationing'''
+
====751.5.1.3.7 Nomenclature ====
 +
In addition to that found in Sec 100, the following engineering terminology, when required, shall be used on bridge plans. This list is not meant to be all inclusive, but primarily contains terminology unique to MoDOT.
  
Stations are one hundred feet.  All stationing should be carried to the nearest hundredth foot as follows:  251+50.14.
+
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
 
 
'''Elevations'''
 
 
 
All elevations will be reported in feet.  All elevations will be carried to the nearest hundredth foot as follows:  1234.98.
 
     
 
PLAN and GENERAL ELEVATION for a skewed bridge shall be shown on Sheet 1 of a set of plans:      
 
 
 
The “Plan” should be drawn to scale.  The “General Elevation” should be drawn as a section through centerline of structure but showing the side elevation of the end bent wing walls and safety barrier curbs.  Only one pier column will be shown (No isometric views of the structure).  The centerline of bents should “line up” on the Plan and Elevation.
 
 
 
'''Pluralization'''
 
 
 
For consistency, when referring to a group of items, the name is pluralized and not the indicator.  See the examples below.
 
 
 
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" align="center"
 
 
|+
 
|+
! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Correct !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Incorrect
+
!Terminology!! Application
 +
|-
 +
|beam|| In general any horizontal supporting member however the term is specifically applied to the following superstructure members: steel wide flange members, and precast concrete box, precast voided slab and precast solid slab members.
 +
|-
 +
|blockout|| A one word noun used for voids formed into structural elements for a particular application (expansion device blockout, flange blockout) or used for a structural element placed in the void formed into another element (curb blockout).
 +
|-
 +
|block out|| A verb used for the process of forming a void into a structural element (The contractor shall block out the end of the top flange to accommodate the placement of diaphragm reinforcement.)
 +
|-
 +
|complete in place|| This phrase is used to cover all work and material required to complete a particular task or construct a particular item. Hyphens are not used and the phrase is usually set apart from the rest of the sentence with commas (Concrete masonry, complete in place, will be paid for…).
 +
|-
 +
|deck|| The portion of the superstructure that supports the live load
 +
|-
 +
|girder|| Large longitudinal superstructure members specifically applied to the following: steel plate girders, precast concrete I, precast bulb-tee, precast double-tee and precast NU members, and any cast-in-place concrete member.
 +
|-
 +
|guardrail|| Roadway traffic barrier consisting of heavy-gauge rolled steel beams mounted on strong posts. It is used to protect traffic from roadside obstacles or to prohibit traffic movements.
 
|-
 
|-
|Sheets No. 1, 2 & 3||Sheet Nos. 1, 2 & 3
+
|option ||A noun used for one of the choices which can be made.  
 
|-
 
|-
|Walls No. 1, 2 & 3||Wall Nos. 1, 2 & 3
+
|optional|| An adjective used for not compulsory; left to personal choice; elective.  
 
|-
 
|-
|Bents No. 1, 2 & 3||Bent Nos. 1, 2 & 3
+
|saw cut|| A noun or adjective used for joints cut into structural elements for a particular application (Silicone shall be placed in the saw cut) (The saw cut joint shall…).<br/>A verb used for the process of cutting a joint into a structural element (The contractor shall saw cut the barrier to the depth shown on plans.)
 +
|-
 +
|slab|| Flat structural member usually formed of a single piece and can transfer loads horizontally to supporting members (slab on beam) or vertically to a supporting base material (slab on grade).
 
|}
 
|}
  
== 751.5.7 Numbers and Symbols ==
+
====751.5.1.3.8 Numbers====
 +
In notes, the numbers zero and one shall always be spelled out (one inch, zero degrees) while all numbers shall be spelled out if at the start of a sentence (Two feet is the minimum distance…).
  
'''Rules for Writing Numbers & Slopes'''
+
In notes, the numerals 2 through 10 shall be used for specific numbered items or if followed by a unit of measure otherwise spell out the number (Bent No. 4, 2 feet, 9 miles, six bolts, eight bars). In dimensions, tabulated data and leader notes; the numerals 2 through 10 shall be used even with quantity of items (6 bolts, 8 bars).
  
Use feet and inches for length measurements. Make inch and foot marks of medium lengths (about 1/16") and place them to the upper right of numbers to which they refer.  
+
Numerals shall be used for all numbers in excess of ten (11 feet, 14 books, 26 miles, 12 sections) except for numerals beginning a sentence of a note (Twelve posts shall…).
  
Use fractions, not decimals for inches (3/4", not 0.75"; 2 1/2", not 2.5").
+
Commas shall be used for numbers 10,000 and greater, for example 14,000 versus 9642.
  
Common fractions shall be written with a vinculum separating the numerator from the denominator.  These bars shall be placed horizontally except for rare cases where lack of space makes this impractical or when placed within a note. Common fractions shall always be given on the basis of architects' scale.  
+
Periods shall be used for the decimal marker of decimal numbers and preceded by zero for numbers less than one (0.254).
  
Some examples of fractions used in a note are:
+
Fractions used in dimensions, tabulated data and single-lined leader notes shall be written with undersized text using a vinculum separating the numerator from the denominator and immediately follow whole numbers (<math> 3 \tfrac {1}{2} </math>"), except for rare cases where lack of vertical space makes this impractical  (also known as “stacked” fractions).
:two 3/4" dia. coil tie rods
 
:2 1/2" x 1 1/4" plate
 
:2'-0 3/8" long bar
 
  
The decimal marker shall be a period.
+
Fractions used in notes and multiple-lined leader notes shall be written with regular text using a forward slash separating the numerator from the denominator and separated from whole numbers by a space (1 1/2).
  
Slope is expressed in non-dimensional ratios. The horizontal component will be shown first followed by the vertical component (H:V). The horizontal component is unitary for slopes greater than 45° and the vertical component is unitary for slopes less than 45°. The components in a slope ratio must be of identical units.
+
Where multiple numbers are needed in a note, use commas or reword to avoid confusion (Instead of “Use 36 0.6”Ø Grade 270 strands with…”, say “Use 36 strands, 0.6”Ø Grade 270, with…”); or spell out one or more of the numbers (Two 1 1/2-inch diameter bolts).
  
'''Rules for Writing Symbols'''
+
===751.5.1.4 Contract Plan File Name Convention===
 +
The file naming convention for all Bridge contract plans shall be: '''B_[bridge#]_[sheet#]_[job#]_[''optional'' description].dgn'''. (''Example:''   B_A8690_004_J3S2219_BENT1.dgn'')
  
Only approved symbols shall be used for noting reinforcing bars, structural steel shapes, bolts, welding, dimensions, angles, etc. Symbols shall not be omitted where they apply except in authorized designation of structural steel shapes. Welding symbols shall be in accordance with American Welding Society (AWS).
+
::'''B''' for Bridge.
 +
::'''[bridge number]''' (e.g. A8690).
 +
::'''[sheet#]''' is the number of a particular sheet unique to a bridge number (e.g. 004).
 +
::'''[job#]''' is the job number assigned to the project (e.g. J3S2219).
 +
::'''[''optional'' description]''' is an abbreviated description of the sheet information (e.g. BENT1, DRAINvert, BCelev, SLABplan ).
  
== 751.5.8 Abbreviations ==
+
NO spaces or special characters shall be used in the filename. Acceptable characters are letters, numbers, underscores or dashes.
  
In general, abbreviations shall not be used in notes or drawings except for short notes located where space is very limited. Care shall be taken to avoid the extravagant use of abbreviations for any purpose. However, approved abbreviations may be conservatively used for noting and labeling the various items and details of the plans and of the tabulated data. Titles may be abbreviated where required by lack of space.
+
===751.5.1.5 Order of Plan Sheets ===
  
The following is a partial list of approved abbreviations and should be observed where applicable.
+
The following table provides the preferred order of plan sheets for most new girder and beam bridges or the widening of girder and beam bridges.  
 
+
<center>
{| border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" align="center"
+
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
 
+
|+
|American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials||AASHTO
+
!Type of Sheet!! General Name of Sheet !!Comments
 
|-
 
|-
|About||Abt.
+
|rowspan="4" width="150"|Location and Layout|| width="400"|Plan and General Elevation (Front Sheet) ||rowspan="4" width="325" valign="bottom"|<sup>1</sup> Required with curved bridges.
 
|-
 
|-
|Abutment||Abut.
+
|Estimated Quantities and General Notes
 
|-
 
|-
|And||&
+
|Staged Construction
 
|-
 
|-
|Angle||Ang.
+
|Substructure Layout <sup>1</sup>
 
|-
 
|-
|Approach||Appr.
+
|rowspan="6"| Substructure||CIP Piles|| rowspan="6"|
 
|-
 
|-
|Approximately||Approx.
+
|First End Bent
 
|-
 
|-
|Approved||Appv.
+
|Vertical Drain at End Bents
 
|-
 
|-
|Alternate, Alternately||Alt.
+
|Intermediate Bents
 
|-
 
|-
|Area||Ar.
+
|Last End Bent
 
|-
 
|-
|Asphalt||Asph.
+
|Bearings and Girder/Beam Chairs
 
|-
 
|-
|American Society for Testing and Materials||ASTM
+
|rowspan="6"|Superstructure:<br/>Concrete <br/>Girders and Beams||Girder Layout<sup>1 & 2</sup>||rowspan="6" valign="top"|<sup>2</sup>Steel intermediate diaphragm details may be added to this sheet if space allows.<br/><sup>3</sup> For NU Girders, WWR sheet comes before the Bars sheet.<br/><sup>4</sup> Required with an expansion device at the end bent.
 
|-
 
|-
|Avenue||Ave.
+
|Prestressed Girders or Beams<sup>3</sup>
 
|-
 
|-
|Average||Avg
+
|Steel Intermediate Diaphragms
 
|-
 
|-
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
+
|End Diaphragm at First End Bent <sup>4</sup>
 
|-
 
|-
|Baluster||Bal.
+
|Diaphragms at Intermediate Bents
|-
 
|Backfill||Bkfl.
 
|-
 
|Beam||Bm.
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Bench Mark||B.M.
+
|End Diaphragm at Last Bent <sup>4</sup>
 
|-
 
|-
|Bearing||Brg.
+
|rowspan="6"|Superstructure:<br/>Steel Girders and Beams <sup>5</sup>|| Plan of Structural Steel||rowspan="6" |<sup>5</sup> For simpler bridges, the sheets shown may be details that are combined on sheets titled “Steel Plate Girders” or “Steel Wide Flange Beams”
|-
 
|Bent||Bt.
 
|-
 
|Bevel||Bev.
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Bituminous||Bit.
+
|Elevation of Girder/Beam
|-
 
|Bottom||Bott.
 
|-
 
|Bracket||Brkt.
 
|- 
 
|Bridge||Br. 
 
|-
 
|Building||Bldg.
 
 
|-
 
|-
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
+
|Girder/Beam Curve Offsets <sup>1</sup>
 
|-
 
|-
|Cantilever||Cant.
+
|Camber and Dead Load Deflection
|-
 
|Cast Iron||C.I.
 
|- 
 
|Centers||Cts. or Ctrs.
 
|- 
 
|Center to Center||Ctr. to Ctr.
 
|-
 
|Channel (Stream)||Chan.
 
|-
 
|Clear or Clearing||Cl.
 
 
|-
 
|-
||Collision (Wall)||Coll.
+
|Splices
|- 
 
|Column||Col.
 
|- 
 
|Concrete||Conc.
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute||CRSI
+
|Diaphragms, Crossframes and Stiffeners
 
|-
 
|-
|Connection||Conn.
+
|rowspan="8"|Superstructure:<br/>Bridge Decks|| Precast Prestressed Panels ||rowspan="8"|<sup>6</sup> Camber refers to the P/S camber diagram and is only required for concrete members.<br/>Haunching refers to the diagram for concrete members and to the detail for steel members.<br/>Slab Elevations refer to the theoretical bottom of slab elevation table.<br/>Often the haunching and slab elevations for steel members are shown on the same sheet with camber and dead deflection diagrams for simpler bridges.
 
|-
 
|-
|Construction||Const.
+
|Slab Drains
|-
 
|Continuous||Cont.
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Corrugated||Corr.
+
|Expansion Devices
|-
 
|Counterfort||Ctft.
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Countersunk||Ctsk.
+
|Camber, Haunching and Slab Elevations<sup>6</sup>
|-
 
|County||Co.
 
|-
 
|Creek||Cr.
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Creosoted||Creo.
+
|Plan of Slab Showing Reinforcement
|-
 
|Cubic (Yd., Ft.,  In.)||Cu.
 
|-
 
|Cubic feet per second||cfs.
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Culvert||Culv.
+
|Section Thru Slab
 
|-
 
|-
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
+
|Slab Pouring Sequence
 
|-
 
|-
|Dead Load||D.L.
+
|Slab Curve Ordinates<sup>1</sup>
|- 
 
|Deck Girder||D.G.
 
|- 
 
|Department||Dept.
 
|-
 
|Design||Des.
 
|-
 
|Detail||Det.
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Diagram||Diag.
+
|rowspan="3"|Superstructure:<br/>Barrier or Railing|| Elevation Sheet ||rowspan="3"|  
|-
 
|Diameter||Dia.
 
|-
 
|Ditto (Steel Details)||Do.
 
|-
 
|Division||Div.
 
|-
 
|Double||Dbl.
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Drawing||Dwg.
+
|Barrier or Railing Details at End Bents
 
|-
 
|-
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
+
|Median Barrier Details
 
|-
 
|-
|East||E.
+
|rowspan="5"|Miscellaneous Sheets|| Approach Slab ||rowspan="5"|  
 
|-
 
|-
|Elevation||Elev. or El.
+
|Bill of Reinforcing Steel
 
|-
 
|-
|Engineer||Engr.
+
|Sign Attachments
 
|-
 
|-
|Estimate||Est.
+
|As-Built Pile and/or Drilled Shaft Data
 
|-
 
|-
|Excavation||Exc. 
+
|Boring Data
 +
|}
 +
</center>
 +
 
 +
For simpler bridges some of the above sheets may be combined, for example the section thru slab and slab pouring sequence are often on the same sheet. At the discretion of the Structural Project Manager identical end bents can both use the details of the first end bent with the number of the last end bent being added to the sheet title. Also at the discretion of the Structural Project Manager identical or similar intermediate bents can use the same details adding tables for variable dimensions.
 +
 
 +
For large or complex structures with a large amount of details an Index Sheet is often added as the front sheet. The Location Sketch, Land Survey Block, and the Structural Title Block typically located on the Plan and General Elevation Sheet is located with the Index of Drawings on the Index Sheet.
 +
 
 +
===751.5.1.6 Example Bridge Plan Sheets===
 +
The following contains example bridge plan sheets with commentary:
 +
 
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left" align=center
 +
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" width="350" | '''Example Bridge Plans'''
 
|-
 
|-
|Existing||Exist.  
+
| align="center" | [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Example_plans_basic.pdf Typical Prestressed Concrete Tangent Bridge]
 
|-
 
|-
|Expansion||Exp.
+
| align="center" | [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Example_plans_steel.pdf Alternate Sheets for Steel Bridges]
 
|-
 
|-
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
+
| align="center" | [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Example_plans_curve.pdf Additional Sheets for Curved Bridges]
 +
|}
 +
 
 +
===751.5.1.7 Contract Addendums and Construction Changes===
 +
 
 +
'''Contract Addendums:'''
 +
:* All contract addendums are new documents/plan sheets
 +
:* Central Office Design Division controls contract addendum releases and sequential ordering.
 +
 
 +
A bid revision (contract addendum) will be required if any of the contract documents require revisions after the project has been advertised but before the letting. The revisions shall be made in accordance with [https://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=103.1_Bid_Opening_and_Award_Process#103.1.6.6.1.1_Revisions_to_Plan_Sheets EPG 103.1.6.6.1.1.Revisions to Plans Sheets] while maintaining the existing information. The file names of the revised plan sheets shall be in accordance with [https://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=103.1_Bid_Opening_and_Award_Process#103.1.6.6.1.2_File_Naming_Convention_for_Plan_Sheet_Changes EPG 103.1.6.6.1.2 File Naming Convention for Plan Sheet Changes]. It is important that revision numbers used in the file names of the revised sheets saved to the appropriate contract plans folder in ProjectWise correspond to the number of the contract addendum in coordination with Central Office Design Division Bidding and Contract Services. The new files shall be processed in accordance with [[237.9 Submission of Plans and Supporting Documents#237.9.4 File Naming Convention for Addendums|EPG 237.9.4 File Naming Convention for Addendums]].
 +
 
 +
'''Construction Changes:'''
 +
:* Construction changes may be new plan sheets or revised plan sheets.
 +
:* Bridge Division controls construction change releases and sequential ordering.
 +
:* Sequential ordering for multiple structures in a project is relative to each structure.
 +
 
 +
A bridge change order (construction change) will be required if the final contract bridge plans require revisions after the project has been awarded. Similar to contract addendums, change order revisions shall be made while maintaining the existing information.
 +
 
 +
Revisions shall be identified with leader notes with a “C” prior to a sequential bridge change order number (not project) circumscribed by a triangle. For example, all revisions for the first bridge change order shall be identified with a “1” in the triangle, all revisions for the second bridge change order with a “2” in the triangle, etc. Following the triangle should be one of the following:
 +
 
 +
:* “Added” ← for identifying new details being added
 +
:* “Deleted” ← for identifying existing details being deleted
 +
:* New values replacing existing values
 +
 
 +
The overall revision to the sheet shall also be noted near the lower right side of the sheet using the same “C” and triangle format as used with the individual revisions made on the sheet. Following the triangle should be one of the following:
 +
 
 +
:* “Revised (Date)” ← for existing sheets with revisions being added
 +
:* “Sheet Added (Date)” ← for new sheets being added
 +
:* “Sheet Deleted (Date)” ← for existing sheets being deleted
 +
 
 +
The file name for all revised sheets for the first bridge change order shall contain a _C001 at the end of the final contract plan file name; the second bridge change order shall contain a _C002; etc. The signed and sealed revised plan sheets shall be saved to the appropriate contract plans folder in ProjectWise. The following example shows the progression of file names for plan sheets during bidding and construction.
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
!style="background:#BEBEBE" |[[media:751.5.1.4 file names.pdf|Progression of File Names During Bidding and Construction]]
 +
|}
 +
</center> 
 +
The signed and sealed change order plan sheets shall be printed to pdf, combined into a single file and saved in the appropriate eProjects location. The Structural Project Manager shall send a link to this file via email to the Resident Engineer and copied to others for processing.  A change order template for Outlook is available in [https://modotgov.sharepoint.com/:f:/r/sites/CO_BR/Shared%20Documents/General/Development/Development_Masters/Email_Templates?csf=1&web=1&e=rPxMZ1 Development_Forms]. 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
 
|-
 
|-
|Fabricated||Fab.
+
!colspan="2"|Examples
 
|-
 
|-
|Far Side (Steel Details)||F.S.
+
| width="175" align="center"|'''Revising Existing Sheets''' ||rowspan="2"| [[image:751.5.1.4 revising 2016.jpg|center|675px]]
 
|-
 
|-
|Federal||Fed.
+
|valign="top"|When minor change order revisions can be made clearly to existing sheets, items revised, added or deleted are enclosed using the Detail Circle line type. The overall revision to the sheet is noted near the lower right side of the sheet.<br/>The date and description of the revision may also be added to the final plans title block (optional).
 
|-
 
|-
|Feet or Foot||Ft.
+
|align="center"|'''Deleting Existing Sheets'''||rowspan="2"|[[image:751.5.1.7 deleting 2024.png|center|425px]]
 
|-
 
|-
|Fixed||Fix.  
+
|valign="top"|When details on a sheet are no longer applicable, or change order revisions are too complicated to be made clearly, the entire sheet is crossed out with a bold line (match border). The deletion is noted near the lower right side of the sheet<br/>The date and description of the revision may also be added to the final plans title block (optional).
 
|-
 
|-
|Flange||Flg.
+
|align="center"|'''Adding New Sheets''' ||rowspan="2"|[[image:751.5.1.4 adding 2016.jpg|center|675px]]
 
|-
 
|-
|Floor||Fl.
+
|valign="top"|When a new sheet is needed to replace a deleted sheet or to add additional change order details, the addition is noted near the lower right side of the sheet.<br/>The date and description of the revision may also be added to the final plans title block (optional).
 +
|}
 +
 
 +
==751.5.2 Location and Layout Sheets ==
 +
 
 +
===751.5.2.1 Plan and General Elevation (Front Sheet) ===
 +
Typically, the first sheet of bridge plans for new structures and the widening or extension of existing structures shows a Plan Detail, a General Elevation Detail and several information blocks. For the rehabilitation of existing bridges a Typical Section Thru Deck Detail is shown instead of the Plan and General Elevation. There are also several supplementary details, dependent on the type of structure that may be required. This subarticle provides detailing guidelines for these items.
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
!style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan ="5"|Front Sheet Table of Contents
 
|-
 
|-
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
+
|1. [[#751.5.2.1.1 Plan Detail|Plan Detail]]||2. [[#751.5.2.1.2 General Elevation Detail|General Elevation Detail]]||3. [[#751.5.2.1.3 Information Blocks|Information Blocks]]||rowspan="2" width="150"|4. [[#751.5.2.1.4 Typical Section Thru Existing Deck Detail|Typical Section Thru Existing Deck Detail]]||5. [[#751.5.2.1.5 Supplementary Details|Supplementary Details]]
 
|-
 
|-
|Galvanize||Galv.
+
|1.1 [[#751.5.2.1.1.1 Substructure Elements|Substructure Elements]]||2.1 [[#751.5.2.1.2.1 General Elevation View|General Elevation View]]||3.1 [[#751.5.2.1.3.1 Structure Description|Structure Description]] ||5.1 [[#751.5.2.1.5.1 Location Sketch|Location Sketch]]
|
 
|Gauge||Ga.  
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Grade||Gr.  
+
|1.2 [[#751.5.2.1.1.2 Skew Detail|Skew Detail]]||2.2 [[#751.5.2.1.2.2 Elevations|Elevations]]||3.2 [[#751.5.2.1.3.2 Land Survey|Land Survey]]|| ||5.2 [[#751.5.2.1.5.2 Foundation Data|Foundation Data]]
 
|-
 
|-
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
+
|1.3 [[#751.5.2.1.1.3 Boring Locations|Boring Locations]]||2.3 [[#751.5.2.1.2.3 End of Slab|End of Slab]]||3.3 [[#751.5.2.1.3.3 Final Plans Title|Final Plans Title]]|| ||5.3 [[#751.5.2.1.5.3 Hydraulic Data|Hydraulic Data]]
 
|-
 
|-
|Head||Hd.
+
|1.4 [[#751.5.2.1.1.4 Bridge Roadway Width|Bridge Roadway Width]]||2.4 [[#751.5.2.1.2.4 Bent Number & Fixity|Bent Number & Fixity]]||3.4 [[#751.5.2.1.3.4 Standard Plans|Standard Plans]]|| ||
 
|-
 
|-
|Hexagonal||Hex.  
+
|1.5 [[#751.5.2.1.1.5 Features Crossed|Features Crossed]]||2.5 [[#751.5.2.1.2.5 Vertical Alignment Data|Vertical Alignment Data]]||3.5 [[#751.5.2.1.3.5 Bench Mark|Bench Mark]]|| ||
 
|-
 
|-
|High Water||H.W.
+
|1.6 [[#751.5.2.1.1.6 North Arrow & Curve Data|North Arrow & Curve Data]]||2.6 [[#751.5.2.1.2.6 Ground Lines|Ground Lines]]||3.6 [[#751.5.2.1.3.6 Structural Title|Structural Title]]|| ||
 
|-
 
|-
|Highway||Hwy.
+
|1.7 [[#751.5.2.1.1.7 Miscellaneous Notes|Miscellaneous Notes]]||2.7 [[#751.5.2.1.2.7 Features Crossed|Features Crossed]]|| || ||
 
|-
 
|-
|Horizontal||Hor.  
+
|1.8 [[#751.5.2.1.1.8 Miscellaneous Details|Miscellaneous Details]] ||2.8 [[#751.5.2.1.2.8 Slope Protection|Slope Protection]]|| || ||
 
|-
 
|-
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
+
| ||2.9 [[#751.5.2.1.2.9 Miscellaneous Notes|Miscellaneous Notes]]|| || ||
 
|-
 
|-
|Impact||I.  
+
| ||2.10 [[#751.5.2.1.2.10 Miscellaneous Details|Miscellaneous Details]]|| || ||
|-                  
+
|}
|Inch or Inches||In.
+
</center>
 +
====751.5.2.1.1 Plan Detail====
 +
The following items shall be included in or near the Plan Detail.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.1.1 Substructure Elements=====
 +
For new bridges or the widening of existing bridges the following substructure elements shall be drawn to scale and shown in the Plan Detail.
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
|width="175"|Beam Caps<sup>1</sup> ||width="175"|Detached Wings||width="175"| Rock Sockets
 
|-
 
|-
|Include||Incl.
+
|Collision Walls|| Drilled Shafts|| Seal Courses
 
|-
 
|-
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
+
|Columns|| Footings|| Tie Beams
 
|-
 
|-
|Joint||Jt.  
+
|Deadman Anchors|| Piles<sup>2</sup> ||Webs
 +
|}
 +
</center>
 +
:::<sup>1</sup> Incidental details, such as steps, keyways, and anchor bolts (at the top of beams) shall not be shown.
 +
 
 +
:::<sup>2</sup> Sway bracing shall not be shown at intermediate pile cap bents. Battered piles need only be shown for a short distance past the edge of the bent ending with a long break line.
 +
 
 +
The substructure shall be labeled and dimensioned as shown below. The first drawing specifies roadway elevations as profile grade elevations, since the profile grade is located at the centerline of roadway. On the second drawing, these elevations are specified as grade elevations. The second figure also shows the additional dimension required at the intermediate bents when the centerline of the roadway does not pass through the geometric center of the intermediate bents. This occurs with all unsymmetrical roadways and occasionally symmetrical roadways with horizontally curved continuous prestressed bridges. These drawings are applicable to both tangent and horizontally curved bridges.
 +
 +
[[image:751.5.2.1_plan_07-23.png|center|950px]]
 +
[[image:751.5.2.1 plan notes.jpg|center|920px]]
 +
 
 +
For dual roadways/divided highways, the centerline of median shall be shown and specified and the perpendicular or radial offset from centerline of roadway shall be dimensioned.
 +
 
 +
For tangent, squared structures, the transverse centerline of the bents line up with the centerline of the structure, and therefore the centerline of bent can be added to the centerline of structure’s leader note.
 +
 
 +
When the profile grade is not along the centerline of roadway, but is along either the centerline of structure or median, the profile grade shall be added to the appropriate leader note. When the profile grade is not along the centerline of roadway, structure or median, the location of profile grade shall be shown in the roadway width detail in accordance with [[#751.5.2.1.1.4 Bridge Roadway Width|Roadway Width]].
 +
 
 +
The span lengths for steel and prestressed bridges given in the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout are horizontal dimensions. For prestressed girder or beam sheets, the actual girder or beam length shall be adjusted accordingly for grade.
 +
 
 +
The following additional dimensions shall also be shown in the plan detail:
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
|Length and width of footings and seal courses
 
|-
 
|-
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
+
|Perpendicular distance from centerline of piles to the front face and to the fill face of end bents
 +
|}
 +
</center>
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.1.2 Skew Detail=====
 +
The following skew detail shall be drawn off the centerline of roadway (right angle square can also be used instead of 90° angle dimension):
 +
 +
[[image:751.5.2.1 tangent.jpg|center|950px]]
 +
 
 +
For curved bridges where the referenced radial line occurs at a congested location, and it is not possible to show the skew detail clearly, state the skew requirements by providing the following note:
 +
 
 +
:For Skewed Bents:
 +
::All bents are parallel to a line skewed __ <u>right</u> <u>left</u> advanced from a radial line at station __.
 +
 
 +
:For Squared Bents:
 +
::All bents are parallel to a radial line at station __.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.1.3 Boring Locations=====
 +
All available boring data locations shall be shown with the boring symbol (<i>Boring Symbol</i> cell, under CADD Standards: Front Sheets)
 +
 
 +
Each boring location shall be labeled with its identifying number.
 +
 
 +
[[image:751.5.2.1.1.3_10-26-93.png|350px]]
 +
 +
Add [https://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#Boring_Data Notice and Disclaimer Regarding Boring Log Data] near the Plan detail. This note is available as a cell in CADD Standards: Detailing Notes (<i>E3.2 Notice and Disclaimer</i>).
 +
 
 +
If inadequate space is available for placement of the disclaimer note, place the portion that says “Indicates location of borings.” (including the symbol), and place the rest of the note on the General Notes and Estimated Quantities Sheet. Add a note nearby stating, “For Notice and Disclaimer Regarding Boring Log Data, see Sheet No. _.”
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.1.4 Bridge Roadway Width=====
 +
A small portion of the outside edges of the bridge roadway shall be shown at the proper location within one of the spans if space allows, but may be placed adjacent to bridge if required for clarity. The dimension of the overall roadway width shall be provided, followed by “Roadway”. The dimensions from the centerline of roadway to each edge of the roadway shall be provided also. If the profile grade is not along the centerline of roadway, structure or median, a small portion of the profile grade shall also be shown, and the offset dimension from the centerline of roadway provided. The dimensions need not be specified as radial for curved structures.
 +
 
 +
See the Bridge Memorandum for location of the profile grade. Generally, the profile grade will be shown in the cross section through the superstructure on the slab sheet and in the plan view on the front sheet of the design plans. Generally, the profile grade is at the centerline of roadway for two-way traffic bridges. For one-way traffic bridges used in standard divided highways, the profile grade is at some other location away from the centerline of roadway. When the profile grade is not located along the centerline of the roadway, the centerline of roadway elevations shall be specified as grade elevations.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.1.5 Features Crossed=====
 +
 
 +
'''Centerlines of Features Crossed'''
 +
 
 +
The centerline of existing, new and future roadways, railroads and trails (if known) shall be shown at their proper location, extended slightly past the boundary of the bridge. The intersection of a centerline with the bridge’s centerline shall be specified as follows.
 +
 
 +
[[image:751.5.2.1 alignments crossed.jpg|center|950px]]
 +
 
 +
The centerline of dual lane roadways shall also be shown and specified with the appropriate lane designation.
 +
 
 +
'''Boundary and Clearances of Features Crossed'''
 +
 
 +
Using boundary lines (style 2, weight 1) the edge of travel lanes, shoulders and barrier of roadways and the edges of trails shall be shown at their proper location, extended slightly past the boundary of the bridge. The travel lanes and shoulders shall be dimensioned and labeled as shown in the following detail. The barrier shall be labeled as well.
 +
 
 +
The minimum horizontal clearance to the closest substructure element, wall element, rigid barrier, or to the toe of slope steeper than 3 to 1 (1V:3H) on each side of each roadway and railroad underneath a bridge shall be dimensioned at their proper location and labeled as shown in the following detail. Barrier or railing, beam caps, wall coping, and collision walls will control over columns and retaining walls. The horizontal clearance shall be measured from the edge of traveled way for roadways (clearance includes shoulders and auxiliary lanes) and from the centerline of tracks for railroads.
 +
 
 +
Using detail circles (style 2, weight 1) the point of minimum vertical clearance for each existing, new and future roadway and railroad shall be shown at their proper location obtained from the design. Each point of minimum vertical clearance shall be dimensioned from the intersecting centerlines (unless on centerline) and also labeled as shown in the following detail.
 +
 +
[[image:751.5.2.1.1.5 min vert clearance.jpg|center|900px]] 
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.1.6 North Arrow and Curve Data =====
 +
When the Location Sketch is eliminated, or placed on the General Notes and Estimated Quantities Sheet, the north arrow and all horizontal curve data of roadways going over, under, or within 150 feet of the structure shall be provided near the Plan Detail.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.1.7 Miscellaneous Notes for the Plan Detail =====
 +
Applicable notes of [https://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#E3._Miscellaneous EPG 751.50 E3. Miscellaneous] notes shall be placed near the Plan Detail.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.1.8 Miscellaneous Details for the Plan Detail=====
 +
* Bridge spans, identified in accordance with [[751.5_Structural_Detailing_Guidelines#751.5.1.1.10_Span_Ranges|Span Ranges]].
 +
* Outline of existing substructure components when they are in close proximity to new substructure.
 +
* Temporary shoring required for construction and specified as a roadway item, if applicable.
 +
* For staged bridge construction with MSE walls at the abutments, consider specifying temporary MSE walls on the plan details. Sometimes due to limited space or to retain improved foundation material or to retain existing slope contractor may need to provide temporary shoring prior to constructing temporary MSE wall systems in staged construction, but only the temporary MSE wall should be indicated on the plans.
 +
* MSE walls built in conjunction with bridge shall be shown with the wall number specified. Walls need only be shown for a short distance past the boundary of the bridge ending with a long break line.
 +
* Alignment of new or existing underground utilities that may cause construction difficulties due to the close proximity to new substructure.
 +
 
 +
====751.5.2.1.2 General Elevation Detail ====
 +
 
 +
The following elements need to be included in or near the General Elevation Detail.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.2.1 General Elevation View=====
 +
The general elevation view of a structure is to show the structure in its entirety meaning that, for a bridge, this would include the superstructure, substructure and foundations. Because of limited space on a plan sheet and scalability conflicts, for example in the case of a bridge where a bridge is much longer than tall, controlling the amount of distortion becomes critical. Because of this, the information shown should be depicted as proportionally correct as is possible but in all cases the relational distinctions made should be rational such as correctly showing both the elevation and drawing of the bottom of a drilled shaft as it relates to other details.
 +
 
 +
The elevation of the structure shall be drawn as a section through centerline of the structure but showing the side elevation of the end bent wing walls and barrier or railing. Only one column will be shown (no isometric views of the structure). The bents in the general elevation detail shall line up with the span length extension lines in the plan detail. The vertical placement of structural elements shall be shown as close to their actual location as possible. Long piles need only be shown for a short distance below footings ending with a long break line.
 +
 
 +
These hidden items shall be shown: end of slab, fill face, approach notch, wing brace, collision walls, tie beams, web beams, pile webs and piles embedded in concrete or inside spacers. For clarity, girders embedded in diaphragms should not be shown.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.2.2 Elevations =====
 +
The elevations of the bottom of the following items shall be specified: rock sockets, web beams, sway bracing, spread footings and pile footings. Add “(Not above)” if indicated in the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout. The elevation of the bottom of footing need not be specified when a seal course is present.
 +
 
 +
The elevations of the top of the following items shall be specified: seal course, anticipated sound rock, drilled shafts, permanent casing, tie beams, collision walls and rails of railroads at location of minimum vertical clearance. Add “(Survey Date ___)” to the rail elevation, using the date reported in the bridge survey report.
 +
 
 +
For water crossings, the design flood elevation and low water elevation (ordinary water elevation if low water not available) shall be specified by pointing to the top of a water line symbol placed at the proper vertical location, preferably within the main span of the bridge. A single line may be used to represent the low water elevation if there is not enough room to clearly show a water line symbol. The low water elevation shall not be shown or specified if the stream runs dry.
 +
 
 +
The excavation datum elevation, if required shall be specified by pointing to a single line placed at the proper vertical location, preferably below the ground line, near an intermediate bent. The excavation datum shall not be specified when no excavation exists below that elevation, such as in the case of all intermediate bents being pile cap bents or drilled shafts.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.2.3 End of Slab =====
 +
The end of slab at both ends shall be called out with the following leader note:
 +
 +
[[image:751.5.2.1 end of slab.jpg|center|850px]]
 +
 
 +
[[image:751.5.2.1.4.jpg|right|450px]]
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.2.4 Bent Number and Fixity =====
 +
The bent number and bent fixity shall be specified for all bents as shown to the right. The text for both shall be the regular small text used for all notes. “Fix.” shall be used for all integral bents and non-integral bents with fixed bearings. “Exp.” shall be used for all bents with expansion bearings. “F.” and “E.” may be used if required due to lack of space.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.2.5 Vertical Alignment Data =====
 +
The vertical alignment of bridges shall be placed directly above the bridge in the General Elevation Detail, with vertical curve data placed as near as possible to the vertical point of intersection.
 +
 +
[[image:751.5.2.1 vertical.jpg|center|950px]]
 +
 
 +
A crest vertical curve detail is shown. If the bridge is located on a sag vertical curve, the detail for a sag vertical curve is to be used.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.2.6 Ground Lines =====
 +
Existing, new and future ground lines at the centerline of the roadway of a bridge shall be shown slightly beyond the ends of the bridge. Existing and new ground lines shall be detailed using a solid line (style 0, weight 5) with the appropriate fill pattern except in locations of new slope protection. Future ground lines (such as a future railway track or roadway) shall be detailed using a dashed line (style 2, weight 2).
 +
 
 +
Existing ground lines shall be specified as “Ground Line (Survey Date ___)”, using the date reported in the bridge survey report.
 +
 
 +
New roadways underneath bridges shall be specified as “Roadway and Drainage Excavation Line” at one of the sides slopes or ditches.
 +
Future ground lines shall be specified as “Future Ground Line”.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.2.7 Features Crossed=====
 +
 
 +
'''Outlines of Features Crossed'''
 +
 
 +
Pavement and permanent barriers of existing, new and future roadways shall be shown at their proper location using the appropriate CAD levels.
 +
 
 +
The rails of existing, new and future railroads shall be shown at their proper location using the appropriate CAD levels.
 +
 
 +
'''Minimum Clearances to Features Crossed'''
 +
 
 +
For existing and new roadways and trails, the minimum vertical clearance obtained from the design shall be dimensioned from the location obtained from the design and labeled as shown in the following detail.
 +
 
 +
For existing and new railroads, the minimum vertical clearance shall be dimensioned from the location obtained from the design. The dimension callout shall be the asterisked final railroad clearance note of [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#E3. Miscellaneous|EPG 751.50 E3 Miscellaneous]] placed near the General Elevation as shown in the following detail. The value to use in the clearance note shall be obtained from the Design Layout (may be greater than minimum shown below).
 +
 
 +
It is not required to show the minimum vertical clearance of future roadways, railroad and trails.
 +
 +
[[image:751.5.2.1.2.7 min clearance.jpg|center|950px]]
 +
 
 +
'''Clearances for Traffic during Construction '''
 +
 
 +
For existing and new roadways and trails in operation during construction the note in [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#A3. All Structures|EPG 751.50 A3 All Structures]] specifying vertical clearance during construction shall be included in the General Notes.
 +
 
 +
For existing and new railroads in operation during construction, the following railroad minimum construction clearance detail shall be provided near the General Elevation Detail.
 +
 +
[[image:751.5.2.1.2.7 construction.jpg|center|700px]]
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.2.8 Slope Protection =====
 +
When rock blanket is specified on the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout, it is to be shown in the General Elevation Detail, typically in combination with the slope criteria. The following figure shows common rock blanket details. See [[751.1 Preliminary Design#751.1.2.15 Bridges Over Railroads|EPG 751.1.2.15 Bridges over Railroad]] for criteria specific to bridges over railroads.
 +
 
 +
[[image:751.5.2.1 genrral.jpg|center|950px]]
 +
 
 +
Note:
 +
:When permanent erosion control geotextile is specified on the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout, it shall be specified with the rock blanket. Permanent erosion control geotextile material shall be used under slab drains in combination with rock blanket.
 +
 
 +
:The 100-year flood elevation and flow depth (D) are shown for illustration and are not to be shown on the plans.
 +
:(a) Rock blanket on the spill fill slopes shall be shown to the elevation specified on the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout in accordance with [[751.1 Preliminary Design#751.1.2.29 Protection of Spill Slopes and Side Slopes|EPG 751.1.2.29 Protection of Spill Slopes and Side Slopes]]. If the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout specifies extending the rock blanket above this elevation to provide slope protection beneath slab drains (as shown on the right side of above drawing), the top of the rock blanket on the side slope may be shown with elevation specified. Otherwise the elevation and detail need not be shown.
 +
:(b) A rock blanket apron should extend from the toe of the spill slope into the bridge waterway a distance equal to twice the 100-year flood flow depth D in the overbank area near the embankment, but need not exceed 25 feet.
 +
:(c) See the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout for specified slope of spill fill. Maximum allowable spill fill slope is determined by Construction and Materials Division as specified in the soils survey for each project.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.2.9 Miscellaneous Notes for the General Elevation Detail =====
 +
Applicable notes of [https://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#E1._Excavation_and_Fill EPG 751.50 E1. Excavation and Fill] and [https://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#E3._Miscellaneous E3. Miscellaneous], shall be placed near the General Elevation Detail.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.2.10 Miscellaneous Details for the General Elevation Detail =====
 +
* If fencing is located on the structure, only a small portion of the fencing need be shown at each end of the structure and labeled at one of the locations as “Pedestrian Fence” for chain link fences and “Decorative Fence” for all other types of fences.
 +
 
 +
* Outline of remaining portions of existing substructure components that are in close proximity to new substructure.
 +
 
 +
[[image:751.5.2.1 earth plug.jpg|right|300px]]
 +
 
 +
* Temporary shoring required for construction and specified as a roadway item, if applicable.
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
* When earth plugs are required due to Class C roadway fill, the earth plug and bottom width and slope of plug shall be specified as shown. The Class C roadway fill need not be shown or specified.
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
[[image:751.5.2.1 MSE.jpg|right|350px]]
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
* MSE walls shall be shown, including coping, leveling pad, pile spacers and, if required, gutter and over excavation of unsuitable foundation material. The wall number, spacers, depth of spacers below leveling pad and over excavation shall be specified as shown.
 +
 +
 
 +
 
 +
 
 +
* Outline of new or existing underground utilities that may cause construction difficulties due to the close proximity to new substructure.
 +
 
 +
* Signs or lighting attached to the structure shall be shown and labeled if space allows, but may be omitted if required for clarity.
 +
 
 +
* The location of overhead power lines that may cause construction difficulties shall be shown using an oval or circle Bridge-Miscellaneous object line labeled “Overhead Power Lines”.
 +
 
 +
====751.5.2.1.3 Information Blocks ====
 +
EPG 751.5.2.1.3 Information Blocks provides instructions for filling out required information blocks. The following picture shows each of the required information blocks, and the sections that follow provide instruction for filling out each block.
 +
 +
[[image:751.5.2.1.3.jpg|center|950px]]
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.3.1 Structure Description =====
 +
A description of each of the superstructure types shall be provided at the top of the front sheet.
 +
 
 +
For bridges, this description consists of the span configuration and the type of superstructure followed by “SPAN” or “SPANS” as required.
 +
 
 +
The following elements are used to define the span configuration:
 +
:Parentheses indicate a break in continuity
 +
:Dashes and commas indicate level of continuity, see examples
 +
:Span lengths that are partial foot lengths shall be reported to the nearest tenth foot.
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
!colspan="2"|Examples of Bridge Span Configurations
 
|-
 
|-
|Lateral (Steel Details)||Lat.
+
!Configuration!! Explanation
 
|-
 
|-
|Left||Lt. 
+
|(98’)||align="left"| Single span
 
|-
 
|-
|Length||Lgth.       
+
|(35’)(40’)(35’) ||align="left"|Multiple simple spans with deck joints at each intermediate bent
 
|-
 
|-
|Linear, Lineal (Ft., In.)||Lin.
+
|5@(40’) ||align="left"|Multiple simple spans of the same length with deck joints at each intermediate bent
 
|-
 
|-
|Live Load||L.L. 
+
|(35’)5@(40’)(35’) ||align="left"|Multiple simple spans including a series of same length spans and with deck joints at each intermediate bent
 
|-
 
|-
|Longitudinal||Long.
+
|(35’,40’,35’) ||align="left"|Multiple simple spans with a continuous deck
 
|-
 
|-
|Low Water||L.W.
+
|(5@45’) ||align="left"|Multiple simple spans of the same length with a continuous deck (type of superstructure would need to start with “SIMPLE”)
 
|-
 
|-
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;                                                                              
+
|(35’,5@40’,35’) ||align="left"|Multiple simple spans with a continuous deck including a series of same length spans
 
|-
 
|-
|Maximum||Max.
+
|(65’-85’-65.4’) ||align="left"|Unit of continuous spans
 
|-
 
|-
|Miles||Mi.
+
|(5@45’) ||align="left"|Unit of continuous spans of the same length
 
|-
 
|-
|Minimum||Min.
+
|(65’-3@85’-65’) ||align="left"|Unit of continuous spans including a series of same length spans
 
|-
 
|-
|Miscellaneous||Misc.
+
|(100’-120’-110’)(120’-180’-120’) ||align="left"|Two units of continuous spans separated by a deck joint
 
|-
 
|-
|Missouri Department of Transportation||MoDOT
+
|2@(120’-180’-120’) ||align="left"|Two identical units continuous spans separated by a deck joint
 
|-
 
|-
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
+
|(65’)(120’-180’)(65’) ||align="left"|Simple spans in combination with a unit of continuous spans separated by a deck joint
 
|-
 
|-
|Near Side (Steel Details)||N.S.   
+
|colspan="2" align="left"|Short hand notation if used defaults to the continuous configuration if it cannot be interpreted otherwise. For example (5@45’) means continuous spans however (40’,5@45’,45) means a continuous deck over simple spans. Short hand notation should not be used with decks that are continuous over both simple and continuous spans.
 +
|}
 +
 
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
!colspan="3"|Common Types of Bridge Superstructures
 
|-
 
|-
|North||N.
+
!Precast Concrete!! Steel<sup>1</sup>!! Cast-In-Place Concrete
 
|-
 
|-
|Number||No.
+
|PRESTRESSED CONCRETE<br/>I-GIRDER|| COMPOSITE WIDE FLANGE BEAM|| CONTINUOUS CONCRETE SOLID SLAB'''<sup>3</sup>'''
 
|-
 
|-
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
+
|PRESTRESSED CONCRETE<br/>BULB-TEE GIRDER|| COMPOSITE PLATE GIRDER|| CONTINUOUS CONCRETE VOIDED SLAB'''<sup>3</sup>'''
 
|-
 
|-
|Octagonal||Oct.
+
|PRESTRESSED CONCRETE<br/>NU-GIRDER|| WIDE FLANGE BEAM'''<sup>2</sup>'''|| CONTINUOUS CONCRETE BOX GIRDER'''<sup>3</sup>'''
 
|-
 
|-
|Ordinate||Ord.
+
|PRESTRESSED CONCRETE<br/>SPREAD BOX BEAM|| PLATE GIRDER'''<sup>2</sup>'''|| CONCRETE DECK GIRDER
 
|-
 
|-
|Overflow||O.F.
+
|PRESTRESSED CONCRETE<br/>ADJACENT BOX BEAM||colspan="2" rowspan="5"|
 
|-
 
|-
|Overhead||O.H.
+
|PRESTRESSED CONCRETE<br/>SPREAD VOIDED SLAB BEAM
 
|-
 
|-
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
+
|PRESTRESSED CONCRETE<br/>ADJACENT VOIDED SLAB BEAM
 
|-
 
|-
|Paragraph||Par.
+
|PRESTRESSED CONCRETE<br/>SOLID SLAB BEAM
 
|-
 
|-
|Perpendicular||Perp.
+
|PRESTRESSED CONCRETE<br/>DOUBLE-TEE GIRDER
 
|-
 
|-
|Plate||Pl.
+
|align="left" colspan="3"| '''<sup>1</sup>''' “CONTINUOUS” or “SIMPLE” shall be specified as required for multiple span structures.
 
|-
 
|-
|Point||Pt.
+
|align="left" colspan="3"| '''<sup>2</sup>''' Non-composite is not required to be specified for steel structures.
 
|-
 
|-
|Pound||Lb
+
|align="left" colspan="3"| '''<sup>3</sup>''' “CONTINUOUS” not required for single span structures.
 +
|}
 +
</center>
 +
 
 +
For culverts, the structure description consists of the cell configuration and the type of culvert. The description ends with CULVERT and is followed with ON ROCK for box culverts without a bottom slab.
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
!Examples
 
|-
 
|-
|Project||Proj.       
+
|3(8’x8’) CONCRETE BOX CULVERT
 
|-
 
|-
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
+
|2(8’x9.5’) CONCRETE BOX CULVERT ON ROCK
 
|-
 
|-
|Radius||Rad. (or R.)
+
|5(6’) CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE CULVERT
|-
+
|}
|Railroad||R.R.
+
</center>
|-
+
 
|Railway||Rlwy.
+
For existing structures that are being modified and/or rehabilitated, the structure description shall start with “U.I.P.” followed by a list of all superstructure work followed by “EXISTING” followed by the span configuration and type of structure. Rehabilitate covers a range of work, including but not limited to slab repair, adding or replacing wearing surfaces, adding curb blockouts and replacing slab overhangs. When removing joints from an existing superstructure or relocating the joints to the intermediate bents, add “TO” after “EXISTING”.
|-
+
 
|Reinforcing||Reinf.
+
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
|width="200"|'''Types of Typical Work and the<br/>Order Listed if the Work is Applicable'''||Redeck, Widen, Seismic Retrofit, Strengthen, Make Composite, <br/>Extend (culverts), Rehabilitate and Reconfigure
 +
|}
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
|width="200"|'''Various Examples'''<br/>(span/cell configuration and type of structure not shown)||width="530"|U.I.P. AND REHABILITATE EXISTING…<br/>U.I.P., REDECK AND REHABILITATE EXISTING…<br/>U.I.P., REDECK AND MAKE COMPOSITE EXISTING…<br/>U.I.P., STRENGTHEN AND REHABILITATE EXISTING…<br/>U.I.P., WIDEN AND REHABILITATE EXISTING…<br/>U.I.P. AND EXTEND EXISTING…<br/>U.I.P., EXTEND AND REHABILITATE EXISTING…<br/>U.I.P., REDECK AND RECONFIGURE EXISTING TO…
 +
|}
 +
</center>
 +
 
 +
Replacing the entire superstructure is an exception to the above rules. For superstructure replacements, a list of all substructure work shall specified followed by “EXISTING SUBSTRUCTUE AND REPLACE SUPERSTRUCTURE WITH” followed by the new span configuration and type of structure.
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
|'''Examples''' (span configuration and type of structure not shown)
 
|-
 
|-
|Retaining (Wall)||Ret.
+
|U.I.P. EXISTING SUBSTRUCTURE AND REPLACE SUPERSTRUCTURE WITH…
 
|-
 
|-
|Right||Rt.
+
|U.I.P. AND REHABILITATE EXISTING SUBSTRUCTURE AND REPLACE SUPERSTRUCTURE WITH…
 
|-
 
|-
|River||R.   
+
|U.I.P., WIDEN AND REHABILITATE EXISTING SUBSTRUCTURE AND REPLACE SUPERSTRUCTURE WITH…
|-
 
|Roadway||Rdwy.
 
|-
 
|Route||Rte.
 
|-
 
|Rubber Compound||Rub. Comp.   
 
|-
 
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
 
|-
 
|Section||Sec.
 
|-
 
|Sheet||Sht. 
 
|-
 
|Shoulder||Sh. 
 
|-
 
|South||S.       
 
|-
 
|Space||Spa. 
 
|-
 
|Specification||Spec. 
 
|-
 
|Square||Sq. 
 
|-
 
|Standard||Std. 
 
|-
 
|Station||Sta. 
 
|-
 
|Street||St. 
 
|-
 
|Stringer||Str.
 
|-
 
|Structural||Struc.
 
|-
 
|Substructure||Substr.
 
|-
 
|Superelevation||Superelev. or S.E.
 
|-
 
|Superstructure||Superstr.
 
|-
 
|Symmetrical||Symm.
 
|-
 
|&nbsp;||&nbsp; 
 
|-                                                                       
 
|Tangent||Tan.
 
|-
 
|Thread||Thd. 
 
|-
 
|Transverse||Trans.
 
|-
 
|Truss||Tr.   
 
|-
 
|Typical||Typ.
 
|-
 
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
 
|-
 
|Variable||Var.         
 
|-
 
|Vertical||Vert.
 
|-
 
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
 
|-
 
|West||W.   
 
|-
 
|Widen or Widening||Wid.
 
|-
 
|Wrought Iron||W.I.
 
|-
 
|&nbsp;||&nbsp;
 
|-
 
|Yard||Yd.
 
 
|}
 
|}
 +
</center>
  
The following shall be used for units for pay items in Quantity Tables (No abbreviations shall be used unless indicated):
+
=====751.5.2.1.3.2 Land Survey =====
 +
The section or survey (SEC/SUR), township (TWP) and range (RGE) of the Public Land Survey System where the structure is located shall be indicated using small bold text in the land survey block in the upper right corner of the sheet.
 +
 +
[[image:751.5.2.1 Land survey.jpg|center|520px]]
  
:each
+
[[image:751.5.2.1 title.jpg|right|155px]]
:cu. yard
 
:gallon
 
:linear foot
 
:lump sum
 
:pound
 
:sq. foot
 
:sq. yard
 
:ton
 
  
== 751.5.9 Welding Details ==
+
=====751.5.2.1.3.3 Final Plans Title =====
 +
The final plans title block shall be provided on all sheets. The following job-specific information needs to be filled in:  project route, sheet number, county, job number and bridge number. Date Prepared fills in automatically when the sheet is printed. Consultant-prepared plans shall also include the consultant’s logo, address and license number in the area provided directly below the Commission’s title.
  
All welding shall be detailed in accordance with ANSI / AASHTO / AWS D1.5, Bridge Welding Code.
+
=====751.5.2.1.3.4 Bench Mark =====
 +
The elevation and location of a bench mark in the vicinity of the structure shall be provided just above the structure title block using small bold text. This information shall be typed exactly as shown on the plat sheet of the bridge survey (typically all uppercase but not always).  
  
The following chart is the suggested minimum weld sizes based on past history; however, these may be increased to satisfy design requirements.
+
[[image:751.5.2.1 bench mark.jpg|center|350px]]
  
{|border="1" style="text-align:center;" cellpadding="5" align="center"  
+
=====751.5.2.1.3.5 Structure Title =====
|-
+
Features spanned, structure location along the stationing route, and the reference station shall be included in the structure title block, located directly to the left of the standard plans block.
|-
+
!width="100pt"|Minimum Fillet Weld||width="150pt"|Material thickness of thicker part joined
+
[[image:751.5.2.1 structure title.jpg|center|900px]]
 +
 
 +
::Note:
 +
:::Do not use “MO” or “US” in front of state route numbers or letters.
 +
:::Use specific names for rivers, streams, state routes, railroads, city streets and county roads. Specific names not required for private roads, pedestrian trails, state and county lines.
 +
:::<sup>1</sup> The stationing route is always the project route for bridges and culverts that carry or intersect the project route and for walls parallel the project route. For bridges, culverts and walls that do not directly involve the project route such as outer roads or secondary state routes, the stationing route is the state route carrying, intersecting or parallel to the structure.
 +
:::The project route is the route the entire project is associated with and is always listed in the final plans title block on the right hand side of the sheet.
 +
:::<sup>2</sup> Should not be confused with a “tie station” on a Bridge Memo used to locate a specific bent with respect to route for purposes of design only. For example, stream piers are sometimes “tied” so a designer knows not to locate it differently. However, plans need not show this station.
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
'''Examples of Structure Title Block'''
 +
[[image:751.5.2.1 examples.jpg|center|720px]]
 +
</center>
 +
 
 +
====751.5.2.1.4 Section Thru Existing Deck Detail====
 +
For rehabilitation of existing bridges a Typical Section Thru Deck Detail is shown instead of the Plan and General Elevation Details. All deck repairs should be specified in this detail.
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" width=360|Detailing Guidance
 
|-
 
|-
|1/4"||t <math>\ \le</math> 3/4"
+
|[[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]]
|-
+
|}
|5/16"||3/4" <math><</math> t <math> \le</math> 2 1/2"
+
 
 +
 
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300" |'''[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/bridgestandards.htm Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
 +
|-              
 +
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/Rehab_surface_wide.htm Deck Rehabilitation]
 
|-
 
|-
|1/2"||t <math>></math> 2 1/2"
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/WFRedecking.htm Deck Replacement]
 
|}
 
|}
  
The factored resistance of a welded connection is governed by the resistance of the base metal or the deposited weld metal.
+
</center>
 +
 
 +
====751.5.2.1.5 Supplementary Details ====
 +
This subarticle provides guidance on several supplementary details that may be required, dependent on the type of structure. These details, if required, shall be placed on the front sheet if space allows. Otherwise, they shall be placed on the General Notes and Estimated Quantities Sheet.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.5.1 Location Sketch =====
 +
A Location Sketch shall be provided for all structures, including culverts and retaining walls. The Location Sketch may be eliminated on grade separation structures, except where payment is made for removal of an existing structure, or a congested area is involved such as a series of ramps, extended slope protection, etc. When a Location Sketch is provided for a grade separation, the tie station of both alignments shall be shown.
 +
 
 +
The Location Sketch for stream crossings shall show the outline of the stream channel at the bridge site. The name of the stream shall be given and the direction of flow indicated by an arrow labeled "Flow". Any required channel change shall be shown and labeled "Proposed Channel Change (See roadway plans)”.
 +
 
 +
The centerline of the roadway shall be shown and noted. The beginning station and outline of the new bridge shall be shown, and the new bridge labeled "Proposed Structure". The existing bridge, if any, shall be shown and labeled "Existing Structure". If it is a state bridge that is to be removed, the bridge number shall be indicated. Place the north arrow near the Location Sketch.
 +
 
 +
When the Location Sketch is placed on the front sheet, all horizontal curve data of roadways going over, under, or within 150 feet of the structure shall be provided nearby.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.5.2 Foundation Data =====
 +
See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#E2._Foundation_Data_Table EPG 751.50 E2. Foundation Data Table] for appropriate data to be included in the foundation data table and notes required below the table.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.1.5.3 Hydraulic Data =====
 +
 
 +
======751.5.2.1.5.3.1 Data Tables======
 +
The following tables for hydrologic data are required on all bridge and box culvert stream crossings. The hydrologic data shall be provided on the Bridge Memorandum or the Design Layout. The appropriate table shall be placed near the Location Sketch.
 +
 
 +
[[image:751.1.5.2.1 data tables.jpg|center|850px]]
 +
 
 +
 +
:(1) See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=748.2_Roadway_Design_Criteria#748.2.1_Roadside_Ditch_and_Culvert_Frequency_Criteria EPG 748.2 Roadway Design Critera]
  
The factored resistance of the base metal is:
+
:(2) See [[748.6 High Water Surface Elevation|EPG 748.6 High Water Surface Elevation ]]
  
:<math>\,R_r=\phi_v(0.58A_gF_y)</math>
+
:(3) See [[748.4 Headwater and Backwater|EPG 748.4 Headwater and Backwater ]]
  
:Where:
+
:(4) See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=748.3_Freeboard#748.3.5_Bridges_and_Culverts EPG 748.3.5 Bridges and Culverts]. Flooding source for freeboard should be recorded in the table when minimum freeboard is not from headwater flow.
:<math>\, \phi_v</math>= 1.0 (Resistance factor for shear)
 
:<math>\,A_g</math>  = gross area of smaller connection element
 
:<math>\,F_y</math>  = specified minimum yield strength of connection element
 
  
:Allowable shear load of the base metal = <math>\,R_r A_g</math>
+
:(5) See [[750.3 Bridges#750.3.2.4.5 Overtopping Discharge and Frequency|EPG 750.3.2.4.5 Overtopping Discharge and Frequency]]
 +
::Provide discharge if frequency equals 500 years or less, otherwise record as “N/A”.
  
The factored resistance of the deposited weld metal is:
+
:(6) See EPG 750.3.2.4.5 Overtopping Discharge and Frequency
 +
::Provide frequency if frequency equals 500 years or less, otherwise record as “> 500 years”.
  
:<math>\,R_r=0.6 \phi_{e2}F_{exx}</math>
+
:(7) Insert “Overtopping” and provide [[:Category:749 Hydrologic Analysis#749.2.3 Overtopping Flood|the Overtopping Flood (EPG 749.2.3)]] elevation if frequency equals 500 years or less, otherwise insert “500-Year” and provide the 500-year flood elevation.
  
:Where:
+
:''*''' Omit rows in table if the Design Flood Frequency is for a 100-year flood event
:<math>\, \phi_{e2}</math> = 0.8 (Resistance factor for fillet weld material)
 
:<math>\,F_{exx}</math>  = tensile strength of electrode classification.
 
  
Allowable Shear Loads for Fillet Welds = <math>\,(R_r)(0.707 )(weld size)</math>
+
======751.5.2.1.5.3.2 Accuracy======
 +
Formulas upon which hydraulic calculations are based are approximations which have been developed from model studies, stream gaging and/or statistical analysis. The hydraulic design formulas therefore are considered to be approximations. Due to the diverse nature of individual drainage basins, considerable engineering judgment must be exercised in hydraulic design to obtain reasonable and practical results. Due to these factors, accuracy used in hydrologic calculations and reported in the hydrologic data tables is to the accuracy listed below.
  
{|border="1" style="text-align:center;" cellpadding="5" align="center"
+
<center>
|-
+
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
|-
+
|+
!width="100pt"|Size of Fillet Weld (Inch)||width="175pt"|Allowable Factored Shear Loads For Fillet Welds *(kips per linear inch)
+
!colspan="3"|Accuracy of Hydrologic Data
|-
 
|1/4||5.939
 
 
|-
 
|-
|5/16||7.424
+
!Hydrologic Data !!Data Limit !!Accuracy
 
|-
 
|-
|3/8||8.908
+
|rowspan="2"|Drainage Area|| Less than 10 mi<sup>2</sup> ||0.1 mi<sup>2</sup>
 
|-
 
|-
|1/2||11.878
+
|Greater than 10 mi<sup>2</sup> ||1.0 mi<sup>2</sup>
 
|-
 
|-
|5/8||14.847
+
|rowspan="2"|Estimated Discharge ||Less than 2000 cfs ||10 cfs
 
|-
 
|-
|3/4||17.816
+
|Greater than 2000 cfs ||100 cfs
 
|-
 
|-
|7/8||20.786
+
|Velocities ||All ||0.1 ft/s
 
|-
 
|-
|1||23.755
+
|Water Surface Elevations ||All ||0.1 ft
 
|}
 
|}
 +
</center>
 +
 +
===751.5.2.2 General Notes and Estimated Quantities ===
  
<center>* based on <math>\,F_{exx}</math> = 70 ksi</center>
+
Typically, the second sheet of bridge plans for new structures and the widening or extension of existing structures shows the general notes and estimated quantities applicable to the entire structure. For culverts, retaining walls and rehabilitation of existing bridges there is typically enough room on the front sheet for these items. This section provides detailing guidance for these items.
  
'''Minimum Length of Fillet Weld'''
+
====751.5.2.2.1 General Notes ====
 +
Applicable notes from [https://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#A._General_Notes EPG 751.50 A. General Notes], shall be placed on this sheet in the order given, based on structure type and information provided in the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout and design computations. The General Notes typically are shown on the same sheet as the Estimated Quantities.
  
The minimum effective length of a fillet weld shall be four times its size and in no case less than 1 1/2”.
+
====751.5.2.2.2 Estimated Quantities ====
 +
Applicable quantity tables and the corresponding notes from [https://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#B._Estimated_Quantities_Notes EPG 751.50 B. Estimated Quantities Notes] shall be placed on this sheet. Typically, the Estimated Quantities Table for the entire structure is placed on the same sheet as the General Notes, with supplementary quantity tables placed below, where space allows. The quantity tables shall be filled out based on the structure’s estimated quantities computations, in accordance with [[751.6 General Quantities|EPG 751.6 General Quantities]].
  
'''Maximum Sizes of Fillet Welds'''
+
===751.5.2.3 Staged Construction ===
  
{| border="0" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0" align="center"
+
When the structure is to be built in stages to allow traffic during construction, the details shall be placed on the Staged Construction Sheet, in accordance with requirements specified in the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout. In a set of bridge plans, this sheet, when required, shall follow the General Notes and Estimated Quantities Sheet.
  
|align="center"|[[Image:751.5 Maximum Fillet Weld Sizes a.gif]]||align="center"|[[Image:751.5 Maximum Fillet Weld Sizes b.gif]]
+
===751.5.2.4 Substructure Layout (Curved Bridges) ===
 +
 
 +
For horizontally curved bridges, a substructure layout more detailed than that provided on the Plan and General Elevation sheet shall be added after the Staged Construction sheet, if applicable; otherwise it shall be placed after the General Notes and Estimated Quantities sheet. The following sketches show the form and content to be used in detailing the substructure layout for some of the most common horizontal curve situations. When situations arise where modification of these sketches becomes necessary, the sketches should be used as a guide with regard to the form and content of the modified layout.  
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" | Substructure Layout Sheet Table of Contents
 
|-
 
|-
|align="center"|<math>\,a<</math> 1/4"||align="center"|<math>\,b \ge</math> 1/4"
+
|1. [[#751.5.2.4.1 Bents Located Using Span Chords|Bents Located Using Span Chords]]
 +
|-
 +
|2. [[#751.5.2.4.2 Bents Located Using Long Chord (Tangent girders and curved deck with varying overhangs)|Bents Located Using Long Chord (Tangent girders and curved deck with varying overhangs)]]
 +
|-
 +
|3. [[#751.5.2.4.3 Built Tangent along Long Chord (Deck slightly wider with roadway striped on a curve) |Built Tangent along Long Chord (Deck slightly wider with roadway striped on a curved)]]
 
|}
 
|}
 +
</center>
  
<center>'''Maximum Fillet Weld Sizes'''</center>
+
====751.5.2.4.1 Bents Located Using Span Chords ====
 +
Attention should be given to the fact that in all cases illustrated here, the centerline of the roadway passes through the geometric center of the intermediate bents. On occasion, particularly in the case of continuous prestressed concrete bridges, or with unsymmetrical roadways, this will not happen. In these and any other case which may cause a similar situation, Dimension D, from the intersection of the centerline of the roadway and the longitudinal centerline of the bent, to the geometric center of the bent, must be shown. The orientation of the bents shall be as noted in the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout. Typically, all bents of concrete bridges will be parallel to a line at a particular station, while bents of steel structures will be aligned radially or have the same skew.
  
<center>'''Standard Welding Symbols and Application of Symbols'''</center>
+
The following key describes the dimensions marked on the following four figures:
  
{|border="1" style="text-align:center;" cellpadding="5" align="center"
+
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|+Basic Welding Symbols and Their Location Significance
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Width="70pt"|Location Significance
+
|width=300|(1) Dimension along tangent ||width=300|(7) Angle between fill face and chord
|Width="70pt"|Fillet
 
|Width="70pt"|Plug or Slot
 
|Width="70pt"|Spot or Projection
 
|Width="70pt"|Stud
 
|Width="70pt"|Seam
 
|Width="70pt"|Back or Backing
 
|Width="70pt"|Surfacing
 
|Width="70pt"|Flange Corner
 
|Width="70pt"|Flange Edge
 
 
|-
 
|-
|height="60pt"|Arrow Side
+
|(2) Offset from the tangent ||(8) Angle between fill face and radial line
|[[Image:751.5 fillet ns.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 plug ns.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 spot ns.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 stud ns.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 seam ns.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 back ns.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 surfacing ns.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 flange corner ns.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 flange edge ns.gif]]
 
 
|-
 
|-
|height="60pt"|Other Side
+
|(3) Angle between chords of adjacent spans ||(9) Angle between tangent and chord
|[[Image:751.5 fillet fs.gif]]
+
|-
|[[Image:751.5 plug fs.gif]]
+
|(4) Chord length ||(10) Skew angle
|[[Image:751.5 spot fs.gif]]
+
|-
|Not Used
+
|(5) Dimension along centerline median or roadway ||(11) Dimension from centerline median to centerline lane along centerline
|[[Image:751.5 seam fs.gif]]
+
bent
|[[Image:751.5 back fs.gif]]
+
|-
|Not Used
+
|(6) Angle between centerline bent and chord ||(12) Dimension from centerline median to centerline lane along fill face
|[[Image:751.5 flange corner fs.gif]]
+
|}
|[[Image:751.5 flange edge fs.gif]]
+
 
 +
=====751.5.2.4.1.1 Dual Lane Structures Tied at Fill Face of End Bent =====
 +
[[image:751.5.2.4 dual.jpg|center|900px]]
 +
 +
=====751.5.2.4.1.2 Single Lane Structure Tied at Fill Face of End Bent =====
 +
[[image:751.5.2.4 single.jpg|center|900px]]
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.4.1.3 Dual Lane Structure Tied at Intersection =====
 +
[[image:751.5.2.4 dual intersection.jpg|center|900px]]
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.4.1.4 Single Lane Structure Tied at Intersection =====
 +
[[image:751.5.2.4 single intersection.jpg|center|900px]]
 +
 
 +
====751.5.2.4.2 Bents Located Using Long Chord (Tangent girders and curved deck with varying overhangs) ====
 +
 
 +
When noted on the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout, short bridges on small horizontal curve alignments may be detailed on a line parallel to the long chord. The intent is to simplify the bridge geometry by placing the centerline of steel or P/S assembly on or parallel to the long chord to the centerline of roadway curve between fill faces of end bents. In order to avoid excessive slab overhangs, the line parallel to the long chord is usually placed at one-half the mid ordinate between curve and long chord. For this situation, the outside faces of the slab, barrier or railing, and wings shall be detailed concentrically with the roadway curvature, and curve ordinates shall be furnished on the plans.
 +
 
 +
It is to be noted that even for symmetrical width bridges, the location of bearings will not be symmetrical about the centerline of bents. Also, the intermediate bent caps shall be built to sufficient length on each end to accommodate the bearing offsets toward each end.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.2.4.2.1 Squared and Symmetrical Roadway and Spans =====
 +
[[image:751.5.2.4 symmetrical.jpg|center|900px]]
 +
 +
=====751.5.2.4.2.2 Squared and Unsymmetrical Roadway, Symmetrical Spans =====
 +
[[image:751.5.2.4 unsymmetrical.jpg|center|900px]]
 +
 +
=====751.5.2.4.2.3 Skewed and Symmetrical Roadway and Spans =====
 +
[[image:751.5.2.4 skewed.jpg|center|900px]]
 +
 +
====751.5.2.4.3 Built Tangent along Long Chord (Deck slightly wider with roadway striped on a curve) ====
 +
For wide roadways and very small degrees of curvature for which the mid ordinates are 3 inches or less, the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout may occasionally direct that the entire bridge be detailed as a tangent bridge along the long chord. For this situation, no parts of the bridge are to be curved. Details for the plan view on the plan and general elevation sheet shall be in accordance with [[#751.5.2.1.1.1 Plan View |EPG 751.5.2.1.1.1 Plan View]], except that the centerline of structure will be on the long chord. A supplementary bridge substructure layout sheet shall not be required for this type of layout.
 +
 
 +
==751.5.3 Bridge Substructure Sheets ==
 +
 
 +
===751.5.3.1 End Bents===
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" | Detailing Guidance
 
|-
 
|-
|height="60pt"|Both Sides
+
|[[751.30 Open Concrete End Bents|EPG 751.30 Open Concrete End Bents]]
|[[Image:751.5 fillet bs.gif]]
 
|Not Used
 
|Not Used
 
|Not Used
 
|Not Used
 
|Not Used
 
|Not Used
 
|Not Used
 
|Not Used
 
 
|-
 
|-
|height="60pt"|No Arrow Side or Other Side Significance
+
|[[751.33 Concrete Semi Deep Abutments|EPG 751.33 Concrete Semi Deep Abutments]]
|Not Used
 
|Not Used
 
|[[Image:751.5 spot bs.gif]]
 
|Not Used
 
|[[Image:751.5 seam bs.gif]]
 
|Not Used
 
|Not Used
 
|Not Used
 
|Not Used
 
 
|-
 
|-
{|border="1" style="text-align:center;" cellpadding="5" align="center"
+
|[[751.34 Concrete Pile Cap Non-Integral End Bents|EPG 751.34 Concrete Pile Cap Non-Integral End Bents]]
 
|-
 
|-
|colspan="9"|Groove
+
|[[751.35 Concrete Pile Cap Integral End Bents|EPG 751.35 Concrete Pile Cap Integral End Bents]]
 
|-
 
|-
|width="70"|Location Significance
+
|[[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]]
|width="80"|Square
+
|}
|width="80"|V
+
 
|width="80"|Bevel
+
 
|width="80"|U
+
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
|width="80"|J
+
|+
|width="80"|Flare-V
+
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300" |'''[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/bridgestandards.htm Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
|width="80"|Flare-Bevel
 
|width="70"|Scarf for Brazed Joint
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Arrow Side
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/pile_new_title_block.htm Cast-In-Place Pile]
|[[Image:751.5 square ns.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 v ns.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 bevel ns.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 u ns.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 j ns.gif]]
 
|Not Permitted for Bridges
 
|Not Permitted for Bridges
 
|Not Permitted for Bridges
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Other Side
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/dead_man_new_title_block.htm Deadman Anchor Systems]
|[[Image:751.5 square fs.gif]]
+
|}
|[[Image:751.5 v fs.gif]]
+
 
|[[Image:751.5 bevel fs.gif]]
+
</center>
|[[Image:751.5 u fs.gif]]
+
 
|[[Image:751.5 j fs.gif]]
+
===751.5.3.2 Vertical Drain at End Bents===
|Not Permitted for Bridges
+
<center>
|Not Permitted for Bridges
+
 
|Not Permitted for Bridges
+
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300" |'''[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/bridgestandards.htm Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
 
|-
 
|-
|Both Sides
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/drains_new_title_block.htm Vertical Drain at End Bents]
|[[Image:751.5 square bs.gif]]
+
|}
|[[Image:751.5 v bs.gif]]
+
 
|[[Image:751.5 bevel bs.gif]]
+
</center>
|[[Image:751.5 u bs.gif]]
+
 
|[[Image:751.5 j bs.gif]]
+
===751.5.3.3 Intermediate Bents===
|Not Permitted for Bridges
+
<center>
|Not Permitted for Bridges
+
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:left"
|Not Permitted for Bridges
+
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" | Detailing Guidance
 
|-
 
|-
|height="60pt"|No Arrow Side or Other Side Significance
+
|[[751.31 Open Concrete Intermediate Bents|EPG 751.31 Open Concrete Intermediate Bents]]
|[[Image:751.5 square_bs.gif]]'''(*)'''
 
|Not Used
 
|Not Used
 
|Not Used
 
|Not Used
 
|Not Permitted for Bridges
 
|Not Permitted for Bridges
 
|Not Permitted for Bridges
 
 
|-
 
|-
|colspan="9"| Supplementry Symbols
+
|[[751.32 Concrete Pile Cap Intermediate Bents|EPG 751.32 Concrete Pile Cap Intermediate Bents]]
 
|-
 
|-
|rowspan="2"|&nbsp;
+
|[[751.37 Drilled Shafts#751.37.1.6 Drilled Shaft General Detail Considerations|EPG 751.37.1.6 Drilled Shaft General Detail Considerations]]
|rowspan="2"|Weld-All Around
 
|rowspan="2"|Field Weld
 
|rowspan="2"|Melt-Thru
 
|rowspan="2"|Consumable Insert
 
|rowspan="2"|Backing Spacer
 
|colspan="3"|Contour
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Flush||Convex||Concave
+
|[[751.38 Spread Footings#751.38.8.3.1 Spread Footing Reinforcement|EPG 751.38.8.3.1 Spread Footing Reinforcement]]
 
|-
 
|-
|Symbols
+
|[[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]]
|[[Image:751.5 weld-all around.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 field weld.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 melt-thru.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 consumable insert.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 backing spacer.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 flush.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 convex.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 concave.gif]]
 
 
|}
 
|}
(*) Normally not used except for flush or upset welds
 
  
{|border="1" style="text-align:center;" cellpadding="5" align="center"
+
 
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300" |'''[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/bridgestandards.htm Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
 
|-
 
|-
|width="690"|Location of Elements of a Welding Symbol
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/pile_new_title_block.htm Cast-In-Place Pile]
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 Location of Elements of a Welding Symbol.gif]]
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/drilled_shaft_new_title_block.htm As Built Drilled Shaft Data ]
 
|}
 
|}
 +
</center>
  
{|border="1" style="text-align:center;" cellpadding="5" align="center"
+
===751.5.3.4 Bearings===
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" | Detailing Guidance
 
|-
 
|-
|colspan="3"|Basic Joints Identification of Arrow Side and Other Side Joint
+
|[[751.11 Bearings|EPG 751.11 Bearings]]
 
|-
 
|-
|Butt Joint||Corner Joint||T-Joint
+
|[[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]]
 +
|}
 +
 
 +
 
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300" |'''[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/bridgestandards.htm Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
 
|-
 
|-
|width="220"|[[Image:751.5 butt joint.gif]]||width="220"|[[Image:751.5 corner joint.gif]]||width="220"|[[Image:751.5 t joint.gif]]
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/bearings_new_title_block.htm Bearings]
 +
|}
 +
</center>
 +
 
 +
==751.5.4 Bridge Superstructure Sheets ==
 +
 
 +
===751.5.4.1 Precast P/S Concrete Girders and Beams ===
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" | Detailing Guidance
 
|-
 
|-
|Lap Joint||Edge Joint||Process Abbreviations
+
|[[751.22 P/S Concrete I Girders|EPG 751.22 P/S Concrete I Girders]]
 
|-
 
|-
|width="200"|[[Image:751.5 lap joint.gif]]||width="200"|[[Image:751.5 edge joint.gif]]||width="200"|Where process abbreviations are to be included in the tail of the welding symbol, reference is made to Table 1, Designation of welding and Allied Processes by Letters, of ANSI/AWS A2.4.
+
|[[751.23 P/S Concrete Double Tee|EPG 751.23 P/S Concrete Double Tee]]
 +
|-
 +
|[[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]]
 
|}
 
|}
  
{|border="1" style="text-align:center;" cellpadding="5" align="center"
+
 
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300" |'''[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/bridgestandards.htm Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
 
|-
 
|-
|colspan="3"|Typical Welding Symbols
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/psi_girders_new_title_block.htm Prestressed Concrete I-Girders]
 
|-
 
|-
|width="220"|Double-Fillet Welding Symbol
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/PrestressedBoxBeam.htm Prestressed Concrete Box Beams]
|width="220"|Chain Intermittent Fillet Welding Symbol
 
|width="220"|Staggered Intermittent Fillet Welding Symbol
 
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 double-fillet welding symbol.gif]]
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/diaphragms_new_title_block.htm Steel Intermediate Diaphragms]
|[[Image:751.5 chain intermittent fillet welding symbol.gif]]
+
|}
|[[Image:751.5 staggered intermittent fillet welding symbol1.gif]]
+
</center>
 +
 
 +
===751.5.4.2 C.I.P. Girders and Slabs ===
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" | Detailing Guidance
 
|-
 
|-
|Plug Welding Symbol
+
|[[751.17 Concrete Slab Bridges|EPG 751.17 Concrete Slab Bridges]]
|Back Welding Symbol
 
|Backing Welding Symbol
 
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 plug welding symbol.gif]]
+
|[[751.18 Concrete Multicell Box Girder Bridges|EPG 751.18 Concrete Multicell Box Girder Bridges]]
|[[Image:751.5 back welding symbol.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 backing welding symbol.gif]]
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Spot Welding Symbol
+
|[[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]]
|Stud Welding Symbol
+
|}
|Seam Welding Symbol
+
</center>
 +
 
 +
===751.5.4.3 Steel Plate Girders and Wide Flanges Beams ===
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" | Detailing Guidance
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 spot welding symbol.gif]]
+
|[[751.14 Steel Superstructure|EPG 751.14 Steel Superstructure]]
|[[Image:751.5 stud welding symbol.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 seam welding symbol.gif]]
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Square-Groove Welding Symbol
+
|[[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]]
|Single-V-Groove Welding Symbol
+
|}
|Double-Bevel-Groove Welding Symbol
+
 
 +
 
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="400" |'''[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/bridgestandards.htm Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 square-groove welding symbol.gif]]
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/diaphragms_new_title_block.htm Cross Frames and Diaphragms]
|[[Image:751.5 single-v-groove welding symbol.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 double-bevel-groove welding symbol.gif]]
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Symbol with Backgouging
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/plate_girder_splice_new_title_block.htm Plate Girder Splices]
|Flare-V-Groove Welding Symbol
 
|Flare-Bevel-Groove Welding Symbol
 
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 symbol with backgouging.gif]]
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/DRIP.htm Drip Bars for Weathering Steel]
|Not Permitted for Bridges
 
|Not Permitted for Bridges
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Mutliple Reference Lines
+
|align="center"|[https://www.modot.org/rehabilitation-surfacing-and-widening-rhb Strengthening with Deck Rehabilitation and Paint Overlap Detail]
|Complete Penetration
 
|Edge Flange Welding Symbol
 
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 multiple reference lines.gif]]
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/WFRedecking.htm Strengthening with Deck Replacement]
|[[Image:751.5 complete penetration.gif]]
+
|}
|[[Image:751.5 edge flange welding symbol.gif]]
+
</center>
 +
 
 +
===751.5.4.4 Expansion Devices ===
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" | Detailing Guidance
 
|-
 
|-
|Flash or Upset Welding Symbol
+
|[[751.13 Expansion Devices|EPG 751.13 Expansion Devices ]]
|Melt-Thru Symbol
 
|Joint with Backing
 
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 flush or upset welding symbol.gif]]
+
|[[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]]
|[[Image:751.5 melt-thru symbol.gif]]
+
|}
|[[Image:751.5 joint with backing.gif]]
+
 
 +
 
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300" |'''[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/bridgestandards.htm Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
 
|-
 
|-
|Joint with Spacer
+
|align="center"|[https://www.modot.org/expansion-devices-fing-flat-pcom-strip Expansion Devices]
|Flush Contour Symbol
 
|Convex Contour Symbol
 
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 joint with spacer.gif]]
+
|align="center"|[https://www.modot.org/joint-seals-seal Joint Seals]
|[[Image:751.5 flush contour symbol.gif]]
 
|[[Image:751.5 convex contour symbol.gif]]
 
 
|}
 
|}
 +
</center>
  
{|border="1" style="text-align:center;" cellpadding="5" align="center"
+
===751.5.4.5 Bridge Decks ===
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" | Detailing Guidance
 
|-
 
|-
|width="690"|Arrow-Side Continuous Fillet Welding
+
|[[751.10 General Superstructure|EPG 751.10 General Superstructure]]
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 arrow-side continuous fillet welding.gif]]
+
|[[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]]
 +
|}
 +
 
 +
 
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300" |'''[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/bridgestandards.htm Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
 
|-
 
|-
|Other-Side Continuous Fillet Welding
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/slab_sections_new_title_block.htm Slab Sections]
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 other-side continuous fillet welding.gif]]
+
|align="center"| [http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/precast_panel_new_title_block.htm Precast Prestressed Deck Panels]
 
|-
 
|-
|Both-Side Continuous Fillet Welding
+
|align="center"| [http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/drains_new_title_block.htm Slab Drains]
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 both-side continuous fillet welding.gif]]
+
|align="center"| [http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/Rehab_surface_wide.htm Deck Rehabilitation]
 
|-
 
|-
|Size of Single-Fillet Weld
+
|align="center"| [http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/WFRedecking.htm Deck Replacement]
 +
|}
 +
</center>
 +
 
 +
===751.5.4.6 Barrier and Railing ===
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" | Detailing Guidance
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 size of single-fillet weld.gif]]
+
|[[751.12 Barriers, Railings, Curbs and Fences|EPG 751.12 Barriers, Railings, Curbs and Fences]]
 
|-
 
|-
|Size of Unequal Double-Fillet Welds
+
|[[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]]
 +
|}
 +
 
 +
 
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="400" |'''[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/bridgestandards.htm Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 size of unequal double-fillet welds.gif]]
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/Barrier_curbs_new_title_block.htm Concrete Barrier]
 
|-
 
|-
|Size of Fillet Weld having Unequal Legs
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/thrie_beam_new_title_block.htm Thrie Beam Railing]
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 size of fillet weld having unequal legs.gif]]
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/TwoTubeRail.htm Two Tube Railing]
 
|-
 
|-
|Lengths and Location of Fillet Welds
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/curb_blockout_new_title_block.htm Curb Blockout and Barrier End Modification]
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 length and location of fillet welds.gif]]
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/box_culvert_new_title_block.htm Guardrail Attachment to Box Culverts]
 +
|}
 +
</center>
 +
 
 +
==751.5.5 Culvert Sheets ==
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" | Detailing Guidance
 
|-
 
|-
|Fillet Welds with Abrupt Changes in Direction
+
| [[751.8_Concrete_Box_Culverts| EPG 751.8 Concrete Box Culverts ]]
 +
|}
 +
 
 +
 
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300" | '''[https://www.modot.org/bridge-standard-drawings Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 fillet welds with abrupt changes in direction.gif]]
+
| align="center" | Box Culverts - BXC
 +
|}
 +
</center>
 +
 
 +
==751.5.6 Retaining Wall Sheets ==
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" | Detailing Guidance
 
|-
 
|-
|Weld All-Around Symbols
+
| align="center" | [[751.24_Retaining_Walls |EPG 751.24 Retaining Walls]]
 +
|}
 +
 
 +
 
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300" |'''[https://www.modot.org/bridge-standard-drawings Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 weld all-around symbols.gif]]
+
| align="center" | MSE Wall - MSEW
 +
|}
 +
</center>
 +
 
 +
==751.5.7 Temporary Bridge Sheets ==
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300" |'''[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/bridgestandards.htm Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 weld all-around symbols-1.gif]]
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/temp_bridge_new_title_block.htm Temporary Bridge]
 +
|}
 +
</center>
 +
 
 +
 
 +
==751.5.8 Miscellaneous Sheets ==
 +
 
 +
===751.5.8.1 Bridge Approach Slab===
 +
 
 +
Place the bridge approach slab sheet(s) before the bill of reinforcing steel sheet(s).
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" | Detailing Guidance
 
|-
 
|-
|Length and Pitch of Increments of Intermittent Welding
+
|[[751.10 General Superstructure#751.10.5.1 Timber Header|EPG 751.10.5.1 Timber Header]]
 +
|}
 +
 
 +
 
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300" |'''[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/bridgestandards.htm Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 length and pitch of increments of intermittent welding.gif]]
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/approachslab_new_title_block.htm Bridge Approach Slabs]
 +
|}
 +
</center>
 +
 
 +
===751.5.8.2 Bill of Reinforcing Steel===
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300" |'''[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/bridgestandards.htm Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
 
|-
 
|-
|Length and Pitch of Increments of Chain Intermittent Welding
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/barbill_new_title_block.htm Bill of Reinforcing Steel]
|-
+
|}
|[[Image:751.5 length and pitch of increments of chain intermittent welding.gif]]
+
</center>
 +
 
 +
===751.5.8.3 As-Built Pile and Drilled Shaft Data===
 +
 
 +
Place the as-built pile and drilled shaft data sheet(s) after the bill of reinforcing steel sheet(s).
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300" |'''[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/bridgestandards.htm Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
 
|-
 
|-
|Detail of Steel Pile Splice
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/pile_new_title_block.htm As Built Pile Data]
 
|-
 
|-
|[[Image:751.5 detail of steel pile splice.gif]]
+
|align="center"|[http://www.modot.org/business/standard_drawings2/drilled_shaft_new_title_block.htm As Built Drilled Shaft Data]
 
|}
 
|}
 +
</center>
  
== 751.5.10 Reinforcing Steel Detailing ==
+
===751.5.8.4 Boring Data===
 +
<div style="float: right; margin-top: 5px; margin-left: 5px; width:250px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:center;">
 +
[https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/AttachBoringPDFsToBridgePlans.docx '''Instructions for Attaching Boring Log PDFs to Final Bridge Plans''']
 +
</div>
  
'''General'''
+
Place the subsurface profile(s) at the end of the plans set. All subsurface profiles shall be reprinted without modifying any information.
  
Unless otherwise specified, reinforcement shall be Grade 60, deformed bar * meeting the requirement of AASHTO M31. Details for dimensioning reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.
+
[[image:751.5.8.4_Boring-01.png|center|750px]]
 +
 +
The boring location note provided in [https://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#E3._Miscellaneous EPG 751.50 E3 Miscellaneous] shall be placed below the sheet title (Note E3.4). This note is already included on the Boring Data Standard Drawing.
  
(*) Except that plain bars or plain wire may be used for spirals, hoops and wire fabric.
+
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300" |'''[https://www.modot.org/bridge-standard-drawings Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
 +
|-
 +
|align="center"| Borings - BOR / Boring Template
 +
|}
  
'''Reinforcement Sizes'''
+
</center>
  
For general use, reinforcement may range from #4 through #11 bars with restrictions as described for individual structural components. #14 and #18 bars shall not be used without the permission of the Structural Project Manager.
+
===751.5.8.5 Pedestrian Railing===
  
'''Reinforcement Length'''
+
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" | Detailing Guidance
 +
|-
 +
|[[751.12_Barriers,_Railings,_Curbs_and_Fences#751.12.4_Chain_Link_Fence|EPG 751.12.4 Chain Link Fence]]
 +
|}
  
'''Minimum length''': Minimum reinforcement length shall be 2'-0" except for dowel bars and anchor bars.
 
  
'''Maximum length''': Maximum reinforcement length shall be as follows:
+
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300" |'''[https://www.modot.org/bridge-standard-drawings Bridge Standard Drawings]'''
 +
|-
 +
|align="center"|(Fences-FEN)
 +
|}
 +
</center>
  
{|border="1" cellpadding="5" align="center"  
+
===751.5.8.6 Conduit===
|-
+
 
!colspan="2" align="center"|Uncoated Reinforcement
+
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
! style="background:#BEBEBE" | Detailing Guidance
 
|-
 
|-
|#4 bars and larger||60'-0"
+
|[[751.10 General Superstructure#751.10.4 Conduit Systems |EPG 751.10.4 Conduit Systems ]]
|-
 
!colspan="2" align="center"|Epoxy Coated Reinforcement
 
|-
 
|#4 bars and larger||60'-0"
 
 
|}
 
|}
 +
</center>
  
'''Bar Length Calculation'''
 
  
Reinforcing bar lengths shall be calculated to the nearest 1/8" for individual dimensions and rounded to the nearest 1" for the nominal and actual lengths.
+
==751.5.9 Miscellaneous Details ==
  
Use tables below for figuring reinforcing bar lengths with stirrup hooks or end hooks.
+
===751.5.9.1 Joint Filler ===
 
'''Reinforcement Spacing'''
 
  
Reinforcement spacing shall be in accordance with '''LRFD 5.10.3''' unless modified by the following criteria or elsewhere shown in Bridge Manuals.
+
When joint filler is indicated on any sheet of the plans, the required type of joint filler shall be specified in either the detail or a note.  
 +
<center>
  
{|border="1" cellpadding="5" align="center"  
+
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
|-
+
|+
!colspan="2" align="center"|Minimum Spacing - Moment Reinforcement
+
!width=300|Types of Joint Filler, Sec 1057!!width=300|Typical Application
 
|-
 
|-
|Preferred Min. - Footings||6" centers
+
|Preformed Sponge Rubber Expansion and Partition Joint Filler|| Superstructure (except P/S panels), Pedestrian Structures and Retaining Walls
 
|-
 
|-
|Preferred Min. - Slabs, Culvert Walls and Retaining Walls||6" centers
+
|Preformed Fiber Expansion Joint Material|| Bridge Approach Slabs, Culverts, Slope Protection and P/S Panels
 +
|}
 +
</center>
 +
 
 +
For bridges and retaining walls, preformed sponge rubber expansion and partition joint filler shall be specified in the General Notes, and therefore only details utilizing preformed fiber expansion joint material require identifying this type of joint filler.
 +
 
 +
[[image:751.5.9.1.jpg|center|750px]]
 +
 
 +
===751.5.9.2 Reinforcing Steel ===
 +
<center>
 +
 
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
!style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan ="3"|Reinforcing Steel Table of Contents
 
|-
 
|-
|Absolute Min. - Slabs, Culvert Walls and Retaining Walls||5” centers
+
|1. [[#751.5.9.2.1 Reinforcing Steel General|General]]||2. [[#751.5.9.2.2 Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement Requirements|Epoxy Coated]]||3. [[#751.5.9.2.3 Available Sizes|Available Sizes]]
 
|-
 
|-
|Preferred Min. - All Other||4” centers
+
|4. [[#751.5.9.2.4 Length Limits|Length Limits]]||5. [[#751.5.9.2.5 Spacing Limits|Spacing Limits]]||6. [[#751.5.9.2.6 Cover Limits|Cover Limits]]
 
|-
 
|-
|Absolute Min.||2 1/2” clear
+
|7. [[#751.5.9.2.7 Length Calculations|Length Calculations]]||8. [[#751.5.9.2.8 Development and Lap Splices|Development and Lap Splices]]||9. [[#751.5.9.2.9 Mechanical Bar Splices|Mechanical Bar Splices]]
|-
+
|}
!colspan="2" align="center"|Maximum Spacing - Moment Reinforcement
+
</center>
 +
====751.5.9.2.1 Reinforcing Steel General ====
 +
Unless otherwise specified, reinforcement shall be Grade 60 deformed bars, meeting the requirements of AASHTO M31, except that plain bars, deformed wire or plain wire may be used for spirals. Welded wire reinforcement shall be deformed when used as a substitute for deformed bars. Details for dimensioning reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with the ''Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute  Manual of Standard Practice''.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.9.2.1.1 Reinforcing Callouts=====
 +
 
 +
'''Dimensions and Leader Notes'''
 +
 
 +
All reinforcing steel that is included in a bill of reinforcing steel shall be specified in dimensions and leader notes using reinforcing callouts specifying both quantity and bar mark.
 +
 
 +
One of the two following formats shall be used for callouts:
 +
<center>
 +
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
 
|-
 
|-
|Absolute Max. - Slabs||1.5(slab thickness)
+
|align="center"|'''Bars Placed Individually'''||width="40"| ||align="center"|'''Bars Placed as Pairs'''
 
|-
 
|-
|Absolute Max. - All Other||18"
+
|align="center"|A-#B-CD || ||align="center"|A Pr.-#B-CD
|-
+
|}
!colspan="2" align="center"|Minimum Spacing - Shear Reinforcement
+
</center>
 +
:Where:
 +
:::A = quantity
 +
:::B = bar size
 +
:::C = descriptive letter
 +
:::D = number
 +
 
 +
Omit quantity if only one bar or pair of bars is being specified. The abbreviation for pair(s) shall always be used for callouts.
 +
 
 +
The bar mark (#B-CD) consists of the bar size hyphenated with a bar designation (#6-H100).
 +
 
 +
'''Notes'''
 +
 
 +
Callouts are not used in notes. Instead, the quantity of bars (including if placed as pairs) shall be specified with the bar mark in accordance with [[#751.5.1.1.10 Number Format|EPG 751.5.1.1.10]] and [[#751.5.1.3 Grammar and Punctuation|EPG 751.5.1.3]].  (Two pairs of #4-U100 bars …)
 +
 
 +
'''Bar Designation'''
 +
 
 +
Bar designation consists of a descriptive letter followed by a number typically unique to a desired shape or length. The following descriptive letter shall be used for the following locations.
 +
 
 +
:A – Top & bottom slabs of box culverts
 +
:B – Walls of box culverts
 +
:C – Slip-forming bars in barriers
 +
:D – Culvert headwalls; dowel bars in intermediate bent keys; footings
 +
:E – Vertical bars at end of culvert wing walls
 +
:F – Culvert walls and slabs; corner and wing brace bars in end bents
 +
:G – Culvert wing walls
 +
:H – Horizontal bars in end bents, intermediate bents, concrete diaphragms, culvert slabs
 +
:J – L-shaped bars and top of wings in culverts
 +
:K – Type B, D & H barriers at end bents
 +
:M – Type C Barrier (except for required slip-forming bars)
 +
:P – Stirrup in columns, drilled shafts, & CIP piles
 +
:R – Type A, B, D & H Barriers (except for slip-forming bars & bars at end bents); culvert head walls
 +
:S – Slab
 +
:U – Stirrup bars in end bents, intermediate bents, and concrete diaphragms
 +
:V – Vertical bars in columns, drilled shafts, CIP piles, end bent beams, concrete diaphragm
 +
:W – Wire in a spiral for anchor bolt holes (and size starts with a W instead of “#”, e.g. “W5-W100”)
 +
 
 +
It is recommended to use 3 digits for the number designation (H100 instead of H10, for example) to allow for plenty of numbers for structures with a lot of different bars.  Normally a 100 series would be used for End Bent No. 1 (or Unit 1 on a culvert), 200 series for Bent 2, etc.  Exceptions are S bars in the slab, and C, K and R bars in barriers, which use one digit (S1, S2, S3, etc.).
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.9.2.1.2 Bend Shapes=====
 +
 
 +
'''Types:'''
 +
 
 +
There are two types of bend shapes: standard pin bend shapes and stirrup pin bend shapes.
 +
 
 +
Standard pin bend shapes are bent around standard pins and have a finished bend diameter in accordance with that specified on the bridge plans. Standard 90° and 180° hooks (used in development of bars) are bent around standard pins in accordance with the hook dimensions specified on the bridge plans.
 +
 
 +
Stirrup pin bend shapes are bent around stirrup pins and have a finished bend diameter in accordance with that specified on the bridge plans. Stirrup 90°, 135° and 180° hooks are bent around stirrup pins in accordance with the hook dimensions specified on the bridge plans. The stirrup 180° hooks of Shape 37S may be used instead of the standard 180° hooks when lapping the stirrup bars for shallow structures.
 +
 
 +
'''Shape Number:'''
 +
 
 +
There are 33 standard bend shapes shown with the Bill of Reinforcing Steel on every set of bridge plans. These bend shapes are specified by the numbers 6 thru 38. The letter “S” indicates the shape is a stirrup pin bend shape, otherwise the shape is a standard pin bend shape. Many of the legs of the standard shapes may be omitted as needed to create the required shape.
 +
 
 +
Seventeen of the standard shapes may be specified as either a standard pin bend shape or a stirrup pin bend shape (6, 8, 9,10, 11, 14, 15, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 28, 29, 30, 32 & 33). Ten of the standard shapes may only be specified as a standard pin bend shape (7, 12, 16, 17, 18, 20, 22, 26, 35 & 36). Six of the standard shapes may only be specified as a stirrup pin bend shape (13, 27, 31, 34, 37 & 38).
 +
 
 +
Non-standard shapes may be used when an unusual shape is required, and the shape can’t be obtained from one of the standard shapes. The bending diagram of non-standard shapes are added to the bill of reinforcing steel when required, starting with shape number 50.
 +
 
 +
'''Fabrication:'''
 +
 
 +
Shapes are fabricated in accordance with the latest version of the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, except fabricators shall use the finished bend diameters and hook dimensions specified on bridge plans. MoDOT deviates from CRSI as follows:
 +
:*Use ACI’s finished bend diameter for #4 and #5 stirrup pin bend shapes (4d instead of CRSI’s 5d).
 +
:*Dimension A or G is rounded up to next quarter-inch increment. (CRSI rounds to nearest inch increment for standard pin bend shapes and to nearest quarter-inch increment for stirrup pin bend shapes. CRSI’s rounding does not always provide the bar length needed for minimum extension of the hook).
 +
:*Dimensions H and J are rounded to the nearest eighth-inch increment (instead of nearest quarter-inch increment).
 +
:*Bar sizes 7 and 8 are not used in stirrup pin bend shapes.
 +
 
 +
====751.5.9.2.2 Epoxy Coated Reinforcement Requirements====
 +
 
 +
Reinforcement shall be uncoated bar unless otherwise noted.
 +
 
 +
'''Bridge Superstructure.'''  All reinforcement in integral end bents shall be epoxy coated including CIP pile reinforcement but excluding drilled shaft reinforcement. All reinforcement in diaphragms, slab and barrier or railing shall be epoxy coated.
 +
 
 +
'''Non-Integral End Bents.'''  All reinforcement shall be epoxy coated including CIP pile reinforcement but excluding drilled shaft reinforcement.
 +
 
 +
'''Intermediate Bents.'''  When below an expansion device or when subject to spraying from adjacent roadways (15 feet or less from edge of shoulder), all reinforcement that is partially or entirely above ground shall be epoxy coated including CIP pile reinforcement but excluding drilled shaft reinforcement with greater than 3 inches of concrete cover. Coating of dowel bars shall be same as coating of intermediate bent reinforcement.
 +
 
 +
'''MSE Retaining Walls.'''  When subject to spraying from adjacent roadways (15 feet or less from edge of shoulder), all panel and coping reinforcement shall be epoxy coated. The potential for future widening shall be considered. Epoxy coated reinforcement shall also be considered (regardless of location) where panels will be continuously wetted (around sources of water) and for structurally critical applications, such as containing necessary fill around structures.
 +
 
 +
'''Cast-In-Place Retaining Walls.'''  When subject to spraying from adjacent roadways (15 feet or less from edge of shoulder), all reinforcement that is partially or entirely above ground shall be epoxy coated including CIP pile reinforcement but excluding drilled shaft reinforcement. The potential for future widening of adjacent roadway shall be considered.
 +
 
 +
'''Box Culverts.'''  Epoxy coated reinforcement should be considered for fills 1 foot or less. Culverts located underneath heavily travelled roadways or sagging vertical curves are good candidates for use of epoxy. See the Structural Project Manager or Structural Liaison Engineer to determine the level of epoxy implementation (i.e. top slab only).
 +
 
 +
====751.5.9.2.3 Available Sizes ====
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.9.2.3.1 Bar Sizes =====
 +
For general use, reinforcement may range from #4 through #11 bars with restrictions as described for individual structural components.  Number 14 and #18 bars shall not be used without the permission of the Structural Project Manager or Structural Liaison Engineer.  Number 14 and #18 bars may be used in drilled shafts and rock sockets if #11 or small bars will not work.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.9.2.3.2 Bar Support Heights =====
 +
The height of all reinforcing bar supports shall be carried to the nearest 1/4". See Missouri Standard Plans Drawing 706.35 for details of bar supports.
 +
 
 +
====751.5.9.2.4 Length Limits ====
 +
 
 +
'''Minimum length:''' Minimum reinforcement length shall be 2'-0", except for dowel bars and anchor bars.
 +
 
 +
'''Maximum length:''' Maximum reinforcement length shall be as follows:
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
!colspan="2"|Uncoated Reinforcement  
 
|-
 
|-
|Absolute Min. - Substr. Beams||6" centers
+
|#4 bars and larger ||60'-0"  
 
|-
 
|-
|Absolute Min. - P/S I Girder||5" centers
+
!colspan="2"|Epoxy Coated Reinforcement  
|-
 
!colspan="2" align="center"|Maximum Spacing - Shear Reinforcement
 
 
|-
 
|-
|Absolute Max. - Substr. Beams||12" centers
+
|#4 bars and larger|| 60'-0"
 +
|}
 +
</center>
 +
 
 +
====751.5.9.2.5 Spacing Limits ====
 +
Reinforcement spacing shall be in accordance with LRFD 5.10.3, unless modified by the following criteria or elsewhere shown in the EPG.  
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
! colspan="2" | Minimum Spacing - Moment Reinforcement
 
|-
 
|-
|Absolute Max. - P/S I Girder||Refer to [[751.22 P/S Concrete I Girders|EPG 751.22]]
+
|width=650|Preferred Min. - Footings ||width=200|6" centers
 
|-
 
|-
!colspan="2" align="center"|Minimum Spacing - Longitudinal Compression Reinforcement
+
|Preferred Min. - Slabs, Culvert Walls and Retaining Walls ||6" centers
 
|-
 
|-
|Absolute Min.||4 1/2" centers
+
|Absolute Min. - Slabs, Culvert Walls and Retaining Walls ||5” centers  
 
|-
 
|-
|Absolute Min. - Cols. (thru #10)||2" clear
+
|Preferred Min. - All Other ||4” centers
 
|-
 
|-
|Absolute Min. - Cols. (#11, #14)||2 1/2" clear
+
|Absolute Min. ||2 1/2” clear  
 
|-
 
|-
|Absolute Min. - Cols (#18)||3 1/2” clear
+
!colspan="2"|Maximum Spacing - Moment Reinforcement
 
|-
 
|-
|colspan="2" |For Drilled Shafts and Rock Sockets, see [[751.37 Drilled Shafts#751.37.3.1 Reinforcement Design|EPG 751.37.3.1 Reinforcement Design]].
+
|Absolute Max. - Slabs ||1.5(slab thickness)
 
|-
 
|-
!colspan="2" align="center"|Minimum Pitch - Spiral Reinforcement for Compression Members (Static)
+
|Absolute Max. - All Other ||18"
 
|-
 
|-
|For Columns, Drilled Shafts, Rock Sockets|| See LRFD
+
! colspan="2" | Minimum Spacing - Shear Reinforcement
 
|-
 
|-
!colspan="2" align="center"|Minimum Spacing- Ties (Transverse) Reinforcement for Compression Members (Static)
+
| Absolute Min. - Substructure Beams (single stirrups) || 5" centers
 
|-
 
|-
|For Columns|| See LRFD
+
| Absolute Min. - Substructure Beams (double Stirrups) || 6" centers
 
|-
 
|-
|For Drilled Shafts and Rock Sockets, see [[751.37 Drilled Shafts#751.37.3.1 Reinforcement Design|EPG 751.37.3.1 Reinforcement Design]]. || 5” centers
+
| Absolute Min. - Prestressed Slab Beams, Box Beams and I Girders || 5" centers  
 
|-
 
|-
!colspan="2" align="center"|Maximum Spacing - Longitudinal Compression Reinforcement
+
! colspan="2" | Maximum Spacing - Shear Reinforcement  
 
|-
 
|-
|colspan="2" align="left" width="450"|Absolute Max. - the minimum number of longitudinal reinforcing bars shall be six for circular members and four for bars in a rectangular arrangement.  For other requirements, see LRFD
+
| Absolute Max. - Substructure Beams || 12" centers
 
|-
 
|-
!colspan="2" align="center"|Maximum Pitch - Spiral Reinforcement for Compression Members (Static)
+
| Absolute Max. - Prestressed Slab Beams, Box Beams and I Girders || Refer to [[751.22 P/S Concrete I Girders|EPG 751.22 P/S Concrete I Girders]]
 
|-
 
|-
|Absolute Max. - Spirals||6” pitch
+
!colspan="2"|Minimum Spacing - Longitudinal Compression Reinforcement
 
|-
 
|-
!colspan="2" align="center"|Maximum Spacing - Ties (Transverse) Reinforcement for Compression Members (Static)
+
|Absolute Min. ||4 1/2" centers
 
|-
 
|-
|Absolute Max. - Ties||12" centers
+
|Absolute Min. - Cols. (thru #10) ||2" clear
 
|-
 
|-
!colspan="2" align="center"|Minimum & Maximum Pitch- Spiral Reinforcement for Compression Members (Seismic)
+
|Absolute Min. - Cols. (#11, #14) ||2 1/2" clear
 
|-
 
|-
|See [[751.9 LFD Seismic|EPG 751.9 LFD Seismic]]|| -
+
|Absolute Min. - Cols (#18) ||3 1/2” clear
 
 
|}
 
 
 
{|border="1" cellpadding="5" align="center"
 
 
|-
 
|-
!align="left"|Concrete Protection and Cover||align="left"|Min. Cover
+
|colspan="2"|For Drilled Shafts and Rock Sockets, see [[751.37 Drilled Shafts#751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design|EPG 751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design]].  
 
|-
 
|-
|Conc. cast against and permanently exposed to earth||3"
+
!colspan="2"|Minimum Pitch - Spiral Reinforcement for Compression Members (Static)
 
|-
 
|-
|colspan="2"|Conc. exposed to earth or weather:
+
|For Columns, Drilled Shafts, Rock Sockets ||See LRFD
 
|-
 
|-
|primary reinforcement||2"
+
!colspan="2"|Minimum Spacing- Ties (Transverse) Reinforcement for Compression Members (Static)
 
|-
 
|-
|stirrups, ties, spirals||1 1/2"
+
|For Columns ||See LRFD
 
|-
 
|-
|colspan="2"|Conc. slabs which have no positive corrosion protection:
+
|For Drilled Shafts and Rock Sockets, see [[751.37 Drilled Shafts#751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design|EPG 751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design]].||6” centers for #4 bars
 
|-
 
|-
|top reinforcement||3"(*)
+
!colspan="2"|Maximum Spacing - Longitudinal Compression Reinforcement
 
|-
 
|-
|bottom reinforcement||1"
+
|colspan="2" width=850|Absolute Max. - the minimum number of longitudinal reinforcing bars shall be six for circular members and four for bars in a rectangular arrangement. For other requirements, see LRFD
 
|-
 
|-
|colspan="2"|Conc. not exposed to weather or in contract with ground:
+
!colspan="2"|Maximum Pitch - Spiral Reinforcement for Compression Members (Static)
 
|-
 
|-
|primary reinforcement (thru #11)||1 1/2"
+
|Absolute Max. - Spirals ||6” pitch
 
|-
 
|-
|stirrups, ties, spirals||1"
+
!colspan="2"|Maximum Spacing - Ties (Transverse) Reinforcement for Compression Members (Static)
 
|-
 
|-
|Conc. piles cast against or permanently exposed to earth||2"
+
|Absolute Max. - Ties ||12" centers
 
|-
 
|-
|colspan="2" align="left" width="450"|The minimum concrete cover = 1 1/2" clear for stirrup and tie steel unless otherwise specified.
+
!colspan="2"|Minimum & Maximum Pitch- Spiral Reinforcement for Compression Members (Seismic)
 
|-
 
|-
|For Min. Cover for Drilled Shafts and Rock Sockets, see [[751.37 Drilled Shafts#751.37.3.1 Reinforcement Design|EPG 751.37.3.1 Reinforcement Design]].
+
|colspan="2"|See [[751.9 Bridge Seismic Design|EPG 751.9 Bridge Seismic Design]]
 
|}
 
|}
<center>(*) Absolute minimum cover (2 1/2”) by '''LRFD 5.12.3'''</center>
+
</center>
  
'''Reinforcing Bar Supports'''
+
====751.5.9.2.6 Cover Limits ====
 +
<center>
  
The height of all reinforcing bar supports shall be carried to the nearest 1/4". See Missouri Standard Plans Drawing 706.35 for details of bar supports.
+
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
 
+
|+
{| border="0" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0" align="center"
+
!colspan="2" width=500|Situation !!with=150|Minimum Cover
|+'''Table for Figuring Reinforcing Bar Lengths'''
+
|-
|align="center"|Stirrup and Tie bars Hooks only
+
|colspan="3"|Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth:
 +
|-
 +
|width=50| || - primary reinforcement ||3"
 +
|-
 +
| || - stirrups, ties, spirals ||2 1/2"
 +
|-
 +
|colspan="3"|Conc. exposed to earth or weather:
 +
|-
 +
| || - primary reinforcement ||2"
 
|-
 
|-
|align="center"|[[Image:751.5 bar bending diagram.gif]]
+
| || - stirrups, ties, spirals ||1 1/2"
|}
 
{|border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="1" align="center" style="text-align:center"
 
| &nbsp; ||<math>\,d=(d_b)</math>||<math>\,D</math>(**)||<math>\,r</math>||<math>\,R</math>||<math>\,c(90^\circ)</math>||Deduct<math>\,(90^\circ)</math>(*)||<math>\,A</math> or <math>\,G (90^\circ)</math>(**)
 
 
|-
 
|-
|#3||3/8”||<math>\,D=4d</math> = 1 1/2”||15/16”||1 1/8”||1 1/2”||3/4”||4”
+
|colspan="3"|Conc. slabs which have no positive corrosion protection:
 
|-
 
|-
|#4||1/2"||<math>\,D=4d</math> = 2”||1 1/4”||1 1/2”||2”||1”||4 1/2”
+
| || - top reinforcement ||3" *
 
|-
 
|-
|#5||5/8”||<math>\,D=4d</math> = 2 1/2”||1 9/16”||1 7/8”||2 1/2”||1 1/4”||6”
+
| || - bottom reinforcement ||1"
 
|-
 
|-
|#6||3/4”||<math>\,D=6d</math> = 4 1/2”||2 5/8”||3”||4 1/8”||1 7/8”||12”
+
|colspan="3"|Conc. not exposed to weather or in contact with ground:
|}
 
 
 
{| border="0" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0" align="center"
 
 
|-
 
|-
|width="300"|<math>\,d=d_b</math> = Bar diameter
+
| || - primary reinforcement (thru #11) ||1 1/2"
|width="300"|<math>\,D</math> = Finish inside bend diameter
 
 
|-
 
|-
|<math>r=D/2+d/2</math>
+
| || - stirrups, ties, spirals ||1"
|<math>\,R = r + d/2</math>
 
|-
 
|<math>C (30^\circ) =  2 \pi r(30^\circ/360^\circ) = \pi r/6</math>
 
|<math>\,C (120^\circ) =  2 \pi r(120^\circ/360^\circ) = 2 \pi r/3</math>
 
 
|-
 
|-
|<math>\,C (45^\circ) = 2 \pi r(45^\circ/360^\circ) = \pi r/4</math>
+
|colspan="2"|Conc. piles cast against or permanently exposed to earth|| 2"
|<math>\,C (135^\circ) =  2\pi r(135^\circ/360^\circ) = 3 \pi r/4</math>
 
|-
 
|<math>\,C (60^\circ) =  2 \pi r(60^\circ/360^\circ) = \pi r/3</math>
 
|<math>\,C (150^\circ) =  2 \pi r(150^\circ/360^\circ) = 5 \pi r/6</math>
 
 
|-
 
|-
|<math>\,C (90^\circ) =  2 \pi r(90^\circ/360^\circ) = \pi r/2</math>
+
|colspan="3"|'''*''' Absolute minimum cover shall be 2½ inches by LRFD 5.12.3. <br/>The minimum cover for stirrup and tie steel shall be 1½ inches unless otherwise specified. <br/>For minimum cover for drilled shafts and rock sockets, see [[751.37 Drilled Shafts#751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design|EPG 751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design]].
|<math>\,C (180^\circ) =  2 \pi r(180^\circ/360^\circ) = \pi r</math>
 
|- 
 
|Deduct <math>\,(90^\circ)</math> * <math>\, = 2R - C (90^\circ)</math>
 
|Deduct <math>\,(180^\circ)</math> * <math>\, = 4R - C (180^\circ)</math>
 
 
|}
 
|}
 +
</center>
  
'''EXAMPLE:'''
+
====751.5.9.2.7 Length Calculations ====
{| border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" align="center"
+
Lengths of individual legs of shaped reinforcing bars shall be out to out dimensions using ¼-inch increments and rounded as required to maintain clearances. Lengths of straight reinforcing bars shall be determined using one-inch increments and rounded down to maintain clearances or rounded up to achieve proper lap.
 +
 
 +
Nominal lengths, listed for fabricators use, is the summation of the individual out to out lengths. Actual lengths, listed for determining weight, is the length along the centerline of bar. Nominal and actual lengths shall be rounded to the nearest inch.
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.9.2.7.1 Standard Pin Bend Shapes (All Grades)=====
 +
 
 +
'''Hook Dimensions A or G and J:'''
 +
 
 +
Dimension A or G is rounded up to the next quarter-inch increment to insure adequate extension of hook.
 +
 
 +
Dimension J is rounded to the nearest eighth-inch increment.
 +
 
 +
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:center;"
 +
|- style="text-align:center; background-color:white;"
 +
| colspan="9" | [[image:Std Pin Bend Shapes 001.png|center|]]
 +
|- style="background-color:#c0c0c0;"
 +
| rowspan="2" | Bar Size
 +
| rowspan="2" | d
 +
| rowspan="2" | D
 +
| rowspan="2" | r
 +
| rowspan="2" | R
 +
| 90° Hooks
 +
| colspan="3" | 180° Hooks
 +
|- style="background-color:#c0c0c0;"
 +
| A or G
 +
| C
 +
| A or G
 +
| J
 +
|-
 +
| #4
 +
| 0.500"
 +
| 3.00"
 +
| 1.750"
 +
| 2.000"
 +
| 8"
 +
| 5.498"
 +
| 6"
 +
| 4"
 +
|-
 +
| #5
 +
| 0.625"
 +
| 3.75"
 +
| 2.188"
 +
| 2.500"
 +
| 10"
 +
| 6.872"
 +
| 7"
 +
| 5"
 
|-
 
|-
|align="left" colspan="2"|#4 Stirrup with 2 - <math>\,90^\circ</math> bends
+
| #6
|&nbsp;
+
| 0.750"
|rowspan="8" align="center"|[[Image:751.5 example stirrup.gif]]
+
| 4.50"
 +
| 2.625"
 +
| 3.000"
 +
| 12"
 +
| 8.247"
 +
| 8¼"
 +
| 6"
 
|-
 
|-
| &nbsp;
+
| #7
 +
| 0.875"
 +
| 5.25"
 +
| 3.063"
 +
| 3.500"
 +
| 14"
 +
| 9.621"
 +
| 9¾"
 +
| 7"
 +
|- style="background-color:#ffffcc;"
 +
| #7g<span style="color:#01BF27"><sup>'''a'''</sup></span>
 +
| 0.875"
 +
| 7.00"
 +
| 3.938"
 +
| 4.375"
 +
| 15"
 +
| 12.370"
 +
| 11½"
 +
| 8¾"
 
|-
 
|-
|align="right"|2(2'-6") =
+
| #8
|align="center"|5'-0"
+
| 1.000"
| &nbsp;
+
| 6.00"
 +
| 3.500"
 +
| 4.000"
 +
| 16"
 +
| 10.996"
 +
| 11"
 +
| 8"
 +
|- style="background-color:#ffffcc;"
 +
| #8g<span style="color:#01BF27"><sup>'''a'''</sup></span>
 +
| 1.000"
 +
| 8.00"
 +
| 4.500"
 +
| 5.000"
 +
| 17"
 +
| 14.137"
 +
| 13¼"
 +
| 10"
 
|-
 
|-
|align="right"|3'-0" =
+
| #9
|align="center"|3'-0"
+
| 1.128"
| &nbsp;
+
| 9.50"
 +
| 5.314"
 +
| 5.878"
 +
| 19½"
 +
| 16.694"
 +
| 15½"
 +
| 11¾"
 
|-
 
|-
|align="right"|A + G =
+
| #10
|align="center" style="border-bottom:2px solid black"|9"
+
| 1.270"
|width="50" align="left"|**
+
| 10.75"
 +
| 6.010"
 +
| 6.645"
 +
| 22"
 +
| 18.881"
 +
| 17½"
 +
| 13¼"
 
|-
 
|-
| &nbsp;
+
| #11
|8'-9"
+
| 1.410"
 +
| 12.00"
 +
| 6.705"
 +
| 7.410"
 +
| 24½"
 +
| 21.064"
 +
| 19½"
 +
| 14⅞"
 
|-
 
|-
|align="right"|2(*) = 2 (Deduct)=
+
| #14
|align="center" style="border-bottom:2px solid black"|2"
+
| 1.693"
|align="left"|(From Table)
+
| 18.25"
 +
| 9.972"
 +
| 10.818"
 +
| 31¼"
 +
| 31.326"
 +
| 27½"
 +
| 21⅝"
 
|-
 
|-
|align="right"|Actual Length =
+
| #18
|align="center"|8'-7"
+
| 2.257"
| &nbsp;
+
| 24.00"
 +
| 13.129"
 +
| 14.257"
 +
| 41½"
 +
| 41.244"
 +
| 36¼"
 +
| 28½"
 +
|- style="text-align:left;"
 +
| colspan="9" | d = Bar diameter &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; D = Finished bend diameter </br>D = 6d, (#4 thru #8 epoxy or uncoated bars) </br>D = 8d, (#7 & #8 galvanized bars) </br>D = Values shown, (#9 thru #18) </br>r = radius to centerline of bar = D/2 + d/2 &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; R = radius to outer edge of bar = r + d/2
 +
|- style="text-align:left; background-color:#ffffcc;"
 +
| colspan="9" | <span style="color:#01BF27"><sup>'''a'''</sup></span>  #7g & #8g represent galvanized bars. </br>&nbsp;&nbsp; #7 & #8 represent uncoated and epoxy bars. </br>&nbsp;&nbsp; All other sizes represent uncoated, epoxy and galvanized bars.
 
|}
 
|}
  
<center>(*)  Do not deduct * for a bend where A or G is taken from CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.</center>
+
'''Bend Deductions:'''
  
<center>(**)  See CRSI Manual of Standard Practice  (January 1997) page 6-5.</center>
+
Bend Deductions are provided in the table below. For 180° standard hooks the bend deduction is already included in the A or G dimension. Do not subtract the bend deduction from the A or G dimension for 180° standard hooks.
 
+
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:center;"
{| border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="1" align="center" style="text-align:center"
+
|- style="text-align:center; background-color:white;"
 +
| colspan="16" | [[image:Bend deductions 001.png|center|]]
 +
|- style="font-weight:bold; background-color:#c0c0c0;"
 +
| rowspan="2" | Bar Size
 +
| rowspan="2" | d
 +
| rowspan="2" colspan="2" | D
 +
| rowspan="2" colspan="2" | r
 +
| R
 +
| colspan="3" | Bend Angle V = 30°
 +
| colspan="3" | Bend Angle V = 45°
 +
| colspan="3" | Bend Angle V = 60°
 +
|- style="background-color:#c0c0c0;"
 +
|
 +
| M
 +
| C
 +
| Deduct
 +
| M
 +
| C
 +
| Deduct
 +
| M
 +
| C
 +
| Deduct
 
|-
 
|-
|+'''Table for Figuring Reinforcing Bar Lengths (All Grades, End Hooks)'''
+
| #4
|style="background:#cccccc"|&nbsp;
+
| 0.500"
|colspan="2"|End Hook
+
| colspan="2" | 3.00"
|colspan="3"|Angle (deg.) = <math>\,30^\circ</math>
+
| colspan="2" | 1.750"
|colspan="3"|Angle (deg.) = <math>\,45^\circ</math>
+
| 2.000"
|colspan="3"|Angle (deg.) = <math>\,60^\circ</math>
+
| 0.536"
 +
| 0.916"
 +
| 0.155"
 +
| 0.828"
 +
| 1.374"
 +
| 0.282"
 +
| 1.155"
 +
| 1.833"
 +
| 0.477"
 
|-
 
|-
|<math>\,d</math>
+
| #5
|<math>\,D</math>
+
| 0.625"
|<math>\,r</math>
+
| colspan="2" | 3.75"
|width="80pt"|<math>\,M</math>(in.)
+
| colspan="2" | 2.188"
|<math>\,C</math>(in.)
+
| 2.500"
|Deduct(in.)*
+
| 0.670"
|width="80pt"|<math>\,M</math>(in.)
+
| 1.145"
|<math>\,C</math>(in.)
+
| 0.194"
|Deduct(in.)*
+
| 1.036"
|width="80pt"|<math>\,M</math>(in.)
+
| 1.718"
|<math>\,C</math>(in.)
+
| 0.353"
|Deduct(in.)*
+
| 1.443"
 +
| 2.291"
 +
| 0.596"
 
|-
 
|-
|#3||2 1/4”||1 5/16”||3/8”||5/8”||1/8”||5/8”||1”||1/4”||7/8”||1 3/8”||3/8”
+
| #6
 +
| 0.750"
 +
| colspan="2" | 4.50"
 +
| colspan="2" | 2.625"
 +
| 3.000"
 +
| 0.804"
 +
| 1.374"
 +
| 0.233"
 +
| 1.243"
 +
| 2.062"
 +
| 0.424"
 +
| 1.732"
 +
| 2.749"
 +
| 0.715"
 
|-
 
|-
|#4||3”||1 3/4”||9/16”||7/8”||1/8”||13/16”||1 3/8”||1/4”||1 1/8”||1 7/8”||1/2”
+
| #7
 +
| 0.875"
 +
| colspan="2" | 5.25"
 +
| colspan="2" | 3.063"
 +
| 3.500"
 +
| 0.938"
 +
| 1.604"
 +
| 0.272"
 +
| 1.450"
 +
| 2.405"
 +
| 0.494"
 +
| 2.021"
 +
| 3.207"
 +
| 0.834"
 +
|- style="background-color:#ffffcc;"
 +
| #7g<span style="color:#01BF27"><sup>'''a'''</sup></span>
 +
| 0.875"
 +
| colspan="2" | 7.00"
 +
| colspan="2" | 3.938"
 +
| 4.375"
 +
| 1.172"
 +
| 2.062"
 +
| 0.283"
 +
| 1.812"
 +
| 3.093"
 +
| 0.532"
 +
| 2.526"
 +
| 4.123"
 +
| 0.928"
 
|-
 
|-
|#5||3 3/4”||2 3/16”||11/16”||1 1/8”||1/4”||1 1/16”||1 3/4”||3/8”||1 7/16”||2 1/4”||5/8”
+
| #8
 +
| 1.000"
 +
| colspan="2" | 6.00"
 +
| colspan="2" | 3.500"
 +
| 4.000"
 +
| 1.072"
 +
| 1.833"
 +
| 0.311"
 +
| 1.657"
 +
| 2.749"
 +
| 0.565"
 +
| 2.309"
 +
| 3.665"
 +
| 0.954"
 +
|- style="background-color:#ffffcc;"
 +
| #8g<span style="color:#01BF27"><sup>'''a'''</sup></span>
 +
| 1.000"
 +
| colspan="2" | 8.00"
 +
| colspan="2" | 4.500"
 +
| 5.000"
 +
| 1.340"
 +
| 2.356"
 +
| 0.323"
 +
| 2.071"
 +
| 3.534"
 +
| 0.608"
 +
| 2.887"
 +
| 4.712"
 +
| 1.061"
 
|-
 
|-
|#6||4 1/2”||2 5/8”||13/16”||1 3/8”||1/4”||1 1/4”||2”||3/8”||1 3/4”||2 3/4”||3/4”
+
| #9
 +
| 1.128"
 +
| colspan="2" | 9.50"
 +
| colspan="2" | 5.314"
 +
| 5.878"
 +
| 1.575"
 +
| 2.782"
 +
| 0.368"
 +
| 2.435"
 +
| 4.174"
 +
| 0.696"
 +
| 3.394"
 +
| 5.565"
 +
| 1.223"
 
|-
 
|-
|#7||5 1/4”||3 1/16”||15/16”||1 5/8”||1/4”||1 7/16”||2 3/8”||1/2”||2”||3 1/4”||7/8”
+
| #10
 +
| 1.270"
 +
| colspan="2" | 10.75"
 +
| colspan="2" | 6.010"
 +
| 6.645"
 +
| 1.781"
 +
| 3.147"
 +
| 0.414"
 +
| 2.752"
 +
| 4.720"
 +
| 0.785"
 +
| 3.836"
 +
| 6.294"
 +
| 1.379"
 
|-
 
|-
|#8||6”||3 1/2”||1 1/16”||1 7/8”||1/4”||1 11/16”||2 3/4”||5/8”||2 5/16”||3 5/8”||1”
+
| #11
 +
| 1.410"
 +
| colspan="2" | 12.00"
 +
| colspan="2" | 6.705"
 +
| 7.410"
 +
| 1.986"
 +
| 3.511"
 +
| 0.460"
 +
| 3.069"
 +
| 5.266"
 +
| 0.873"
 +
| 4.278"
 +
| 7.021"
 +
| 1.535"
 
|-
 
|-
|#9||9 1/2”||5 5/16”||1 9/16”||2 3/4”||3/8”||2 7/16”||4 1/8”||3/4”||3 3/8”||5 5/8”||1 1/4”
+
| #14
 +
| 1.693"
 +
| colspan="2" | 18.25"
 +
| colspan="2" | 9.972"
 +
| 10.818"
 +
| 2.899"
 +
| 5.221"
 +
| 0.576"
 +
| 4.481"
 +
| 7.832"
 +
| 1.130"
 +
| 6.246"
 +
| 10.442"
 +
| 2.049"
 
|-
 
|-
|#10||10 3/4”||6”||1 3/4”||3 1/8”||3/8”||2 3/4”||4 3/4”||3/4”||3 13/16”||6 1/4”||1 3/8”
+
| #18
 +
| 2.257"
 +
| colspan="2" | 24.00"
 +
| colspan="2" | 13.129"
 +
| 14.257"
 +
| 3.820"
 +
| 6.874"
 +
| 0.766"
 +
| 5.905"
 +
| 10.311"
 +
| 1.500"
 +
| 8.231"
 +
| 13.748"
 +
| 2.714"
 +
|- style="background-color:#c0c0c0;"
 +
| rowspan="2" style="font-weight:bold;" | Bar Size
 +
| colspan="6" style="font-weight:bold;" | Bend Angle V = 90°
 +
| colspan="3" style="font-weight:bold;" | Bend Angle V = 120°
 +
| colspan="3" style="font-weight:bold;" | Bend Angle V = 135°
 +
| colspan="3" style="font-weight:bold;" | Bend Angle V = 150°
 +
|- style="background-color:#c0c0c0;"
 +
| colspan="2" | M
 +
| colspan="2" | C
 +
| colspan="2" | Deduct
 +
| M
 +
| C
 +
| Deduct
 +
| M
 +
| C
 +
| Deduct
 +
| M
 +
| C
 +
| Deduct
 
|-
 
|-
|#11||12”||6 11/16”||2”||3 1/2”||1/2”||3 1/16”||5 1/4”||7/8”||4 1/4”||7”||1 1/2”
+
| #4
 +
| colspan="2" | 2.000"
 +
| colspan="2" | 2.749"
 +
| colspan="2" | 1.251"
 +
| 3.464"
 +
| 3.665"
 +
| 3.263"
 +
| 4.828"
 +
| 4.123"
 +
| 5.534"
 +
| 7.464"
 +
| 4.581"
 +
| 10.347"
 
|-
 
|-
| &nbsp;
+
| #5
|colspan="2"|End Hook
+
| colspan="2" | 2.500"
|colspan="3"|Angle (deg.) = <math>\,90^\circ</math>
+
| colspan="2" | 3.436"
|colspan="3"|Angle (deg.) = <math>\,120^\circ</math>
+
| colspan="2" | 1.564"
|colspan="3"|Angle (deg.) = <math>\,135^\circ</math>
+
| 4.330"
 +
| 4.581"
 +
| 4.079"
 +
| 6.036"
 +
| 5.154"
 +
| 6.917"
 +
| 9.330"
 +
| 5.727"
 +
| 12.933"
 
|-
 
|-
|<math>\,d</math>
+
| #6
|<math>\,D</math>
+
| colspan="2" | 3.000"
|<math>\,r</math>
+
| colspan="2" | 4.123"
|<math>\,M</math>(in.)
+
| colspan="2" | 1.877"
|<math>\,C</math>(in.)
+
| 5.196"
|Deduct(in.)*
+
| 5.498"
|<math>\,M</math>(in.)
+
| 4.895"
|<math>\,C</math>(in.)
+
| 7.243"
|Deduct(in.)*
+
| 6.185"
|<math>\,M</math>(in.)
+
| 8.300"
|<math>\,C</math>(in.)
+
| 11.196"
|Deduct(in.)*
+
| 6.872"
 +
| 15.520"
 
|-
 
|-
|#3||2 1/4”||1 5/16”||1 1/2”||2”||1”||2 5/8”||2 3/4”||2 1/2”||3 5/8”||3 1/8”||4 1/8”
+
| #7
 +
| colspan="2" | 3.500"
 +
| colspan="2" | 4.811"
 +
| colspan="2" | 2.189"
 +
| 6.062"
 +
| 6.414"
 +
| 5.710"
 +
| 8.450"
 +
| 7.216"
 +
| 9.684"
 +
| 13.062"
 +
| 8.018"
 +
| 18.107"
 +
|- style="background-color:#ffffcc;"
 +
| #7g<span style="color:#01BF27"><sup>'''a'''</sup></span>
 +
| colspan="2" | 4.375"
 +
| colspan="2" | 6.185"
 +
| colspan="2" | 2.565"
 +
| 7.578"
 +
| 8.247"
 +
| 6.909"
 +
| 10.562"
 +
| 9.278"
 +
| 11.847"
 +
| 16.328"
 +
| 10.308"
 +
| 22.347"
 
|-
 
|-
|#4||3”||1 3/4”||2”||2 3/4”||1 1/4”||3 7/16”||3 5/8”||3 1/4”||4 13/16”||4 1/8”||5 1/2”
+
| #8
 +
| colspan="2" | 4.000"
 +
| colspan="2" | 5.498"
 +
| colspan="2" | 2.502"
 +
| 6.928"
 +
| 7.330"
 +
| 6.526"
 +
| 9.657"
 +
| 8.247"
 +
| 11.067"
 +
| 14.928"
 +
| 9.163"
 +
| 20.693"
 +
|- style="background-color:#ffffcc;"
 +
| #8g<span style="color:#01BF27"><sup>'''a'''</sup></span>
 +
| colspan="2" | 5.000"
 +
| colspan="2" | 7.069"
 +
| colspan="2" | 2.931"
 +
| 8.660"
 +
| 9.425"
 +
| 7.896"
 +
| 12.071"
 +
| 10.603"
 +
| 13.539"
 +
| 18.660"
 +
| 11.781"
 +
| 25.540"
 
|-
 
|-
|#5||3 3/4”||2 3/16”||2 1/2”||3 3/8”||1 5/8”||4 5/16”||4 5/8”||4 1/8”||6 1/16”||5 1/8”||6 7/8”
+
| #9
 +
| colspan="2" | 5.878"
 +
| colspan="2" | 8.347"
 +
| colspan="2" | 3.409"
 +
| 10.181"
 +
| 11.130"
 +
| 9.232"
 +
| 14.191"
 +
| 12.521"
 +
| 15.861"
 +
| 21.937"
 +
| 13.912"
 +
| 29.962"
 
|-
 
|-
|#6||4 1/2”||2 5/8”||3”||4 1/8”||1 7/8”||5 3/16”||5 1/2”||4 7/8”||7 1/4”||6 1/8”||8 1/4”
+
| #10
 +
| colspan="2" | 6.645"
 +
| colspan="2" | 9.440"
 +
| colspan="2" | 3.850"
 +
| 11.509"
 +
| 12.587"
 +
| 10.432"
 +
| 16.042"
 +
| 14.161"
 +
| 17.924"
 +
| 24.799"
 +
| 15.734"
 +
| 33.865"
 
|-
 
|-
|#7||5 1/4”||3 1/16”||3 1/2”||4 3/4”||2 1/4”||6 1/16”||6 3/8”||5 3/4”||8 7/16”||7 1/4”||9 5/8”
+
| #11
 +
| colspan="2" | 7.410"
 +
| colspan="2" | 10.532"
 +
| colspan="2" | 4.288"
 +
| 12.834"
 +
| 14.043"
 +
| 11.626"
 +
| 17.889"
 +
| 15.798"
 +
| 19.980"
 +
| 27.654"
 +
| 17.554"
 +
| 37.755"
 
|-
 
|-
|#8||6”||3 1/2”||4”||5 1/2”||2 1/2”||6 15/16”||7 3/8”||6 1/2”||9 11/16”||8 1/4”||11 1/8”
+
| #14
 +
| colspan="2" | 10.818"
 +
| colspan="2" | 15.663"
 +
| colspan="2" | 5.973"
 +
| 18.737"
 +
| 20.884"
 +
| 16.590"
 +
| 26.117"
 +
| 23.495"
 +
| 28.739"
 +
| 40.373"
 +
| 26.105"
 +
| 54.641"
 
|-
 
|-
|#9||9 1/2”||5 5/16”||5 7/8”||8 3/8”||3 3/8”||10 3/16”||11 1/8”||9 1/4”||14 3/16”||12 1/2”||15 7/8”
+
| #18
 +
| colspan="2" | 14.257"
 +
| colspan="2" | 20.622"
 +
| colspan="2" | 7.892"
 +
| 24.694"
 +
| 27.496"
 +
| 21.891"
 +
| 34.419"
 +
| 30.933"
 +
| 37.906"
 +
| 53.208"
 +
| 34.370"
 +
| 72.045"
 +
|- style="text-align:left;"
 +
| colspan="16" | d = Bar diameter &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; D = Finished bend diameter </br>D = 6d, (#4 thru #8 epoxy or uncoated bars) </br>D = 8d, (#7 & #8 galvanized bars) </br>D = Values shown, (#9 thru #18) </br>Deduct = 2M – C &nbsp;&nbsp; (All angles) &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Deduct = 2R – C  &nbsp;&nbsp; (90° only) </br>M = R(Tan V/2) &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (All angles) &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; M = R &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (90° only) </br>r = radius to centerline of bar = D/2 + d/2 &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; R = radius to outer edge of bar = r + d/2
 +
|- style="text-align:left; background-color:#ffffcc;"
 +
| colspan="16" | <span style="color:#01BF27"><sup>'''a'''</sup></span>  #7g & #8g represent galvanized bars. </br>&nbsp;&nbsp; #7 & #8 represent uncoated and epoxy bars. </br>&nbsp;&nbsp; All other sizes represent uncoated, epoxy and galvanized bars.
 +
|}
 +
 
 +
'''Example Length Calculations for a Standard Pin Bend Shape:'''
 +
 
 +
{|  
 
|-
 
|-
|#10||10 3/4”||6”||6 5/8”||9 1/2”||3 7/8”||11 1/2”||12 5/8”||10 3/8”||16 1/16”||14 1/8”||17 7/8”
+
| colspan="4" | Epoxy #7 standard shape with two 90° bends:
 
|-
 
|-
|#11||12”||6 11/16”||7 7/16”||10 1/2”||4 1/4”||12 13/16”||14”||11 5/8”||17 7/8”||15 3/4”||20”
+
| style="text-align:right;" | 180° Hook A
 +
| =
 +
| style="text-align:center;" | 9¾"
 +
| <span style="color:#01BF27">''1<sup>st</sup> table''</span>
 +
| rowspan="9" | [[image:Shape12 example.png|center|]]
 
|-
 
|-
| &nbsp;
+
| style="text-align:right;" | B
|colspan="3"|Angle (deg.) = <math>\,150^\circ</math>
+
| =
|colspan="4" rowspan="7" style="border-right:0px; border-bottom:0px"|[[Image:751.5 30 45 60 degree bend detail.gif]]
+
| style="text-align:center;" | 2'-6"
|colspan="4" rowspan="7" style="border-right:0px; border-left:0px; border-bottom:0px"|[[Image:751.5 120 135 150 degree bend detail.gif]]
+
|  
 
|-
 
|-
|<math>\,d</math>||<math>\,M</math>(in.)||<math>\,C</math>(in.)||Deduct(in.)*
+
| style="text-align:right;" | C
 +
| =
 +
| style="text-align:center;" | 2'-0"
 +
|  
 
|-
 
|-
|#3||5 5/8”||3 3/8”||7 3/4”
+
| style="text-align:right;" | D
 +
| =
 +
| style="text-align:center;" | <u>&nbsp; 23" &nbsp;</u>
 +
|  
 
|-
 
|-
|#4||7 1/16”||4 5/8”||10 3/8”
+
| style="text-align:right;" | '''Nominal Length'''
 +
| =
 +
| style="text-align:center" | 7'-2¾"  =
 +
| '''7'-3"''' <span style="color:#01BF27">*</span>
 
|-
 
|-
|#5||9 5/16”||5 3/4”||12 7/8”
+
| style="text-align:right;" | 90° Bend Deducts
 +
| =
 +
| style="text-align:center" | <u>- 2(2.189")</u>
 +
| <span style="color:#01BF27">''2nd table''</span>
 
|-
 
|-
|#6||11 3/16”||6 7/8”||15 1/2”
+
| style="text-align:right;" | '''Actual Length'''
 +
| =
 +
| style="text-align:center; background-color:#FFF;" | 6'-10.372"=
 +
| '''6'-10"''' <span style="color:#01BF27">*</span>
 
|-
 
|-
|#7||13 1/16”||8”||18 1/8”
+
| colspan="4" style="text-align:center;" | <span style="color:#01BF27">''* Rounded to nearest inch''</span>
 +
|}
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.9.2.7.2 Stirrup Pin Bend Shapes (All Grades)=====
 +
 
 +
'''Hook Dimensions A or G, H and J:'''
 +
 
 +
Dimension A or G is rounded up to the next quarter-inch increment to insure adequate extension of hook.
 +
 
 +
Dimensions H and J are rounded to the nearest eighth-inch increment.
 +
 
 +
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:center;"
 +
|- style="text-align:center; background-color:white;"
 +
|colspan="12" | [[image:Stirrup Pin Bend Shapes 001.png|center]]
 +
|- style="font-weight:bold; background-color:#c0c0c0;"
 +
| rowspan="2" | Bar Size
 +
| rowspan="2" | d
 +
| rowspan="2" | D
 +
| rowspan="2" | r
 +
| rowspan="2" | R
 +
| 90° Hooks
 +
| colspan="3" | 135° Hooks
 +
| colspan="3" | 180° Hooks
 +
|- style="font-weight:bold; background-color:#c0c0c0;"
 +
| A or G
 +
| C
 +
| A or G
 +
| H
 +
| C
 +
| A or G
 +
| J
 
|-
 
|-
|#8||14 15/16”||9 1/8”||20 3/4”
+
| #4
|colspan="4" rowspan="4" style="border-right:0px; border-top:0px; border-bottom:0px"|<math>30^ \circ - 45^ \circ  - 60^ \circ </math>
+
| 0.500"
|colspan="4" rowspan="4" style="border-right:0px; border-top:0px; border-bottom:0px; border-left:0px"|<math>120^ \circ - 135^ \circ  - 150^ \circ </math>
+
| 2.00"
 +
| 1.2500"
 +
| 1.500"
 +
| 4½"
 +
| 2.945"
 +
| 4½"
 +
| 2⅞"
 +
| 3.927"
 +
| 5"
 +
| 3"
 +
|- style="background-color:#ffffcc;"
 +
| #4g<span style="color:#01BF27"><sup>'''a'''</sup></span>
 +
| 0.500"
 +
| 3.00"
 +
| 1.7500"
 +
| 2.000"
 +
| 5"
 +
| 4.123"
 +
| 5¼"
 +
| 3"
 +
| 5.498"
 +
| 6"
 +
| 4"
 
|-
 
|-
|#9||21 15/16”||13 7/8”||30”
+
| #5
 +
| 0.625"
 +
| 2.50"
 +
| 1.5625"
 +
| 1.875"
 +
| 5¾"
 +
| 3.682"
 +
| 5¾"
 +
| 3⅝"
 +
| 4.909"
 +
| 5¾"
 +
| 3¾"
 +
|- style="background-color:#ffffcc;"
 +
| #5g<span style="color:#01BF27"><sup>'''a'''</sup></span>
 +
| 0.625"
 +
| 3.75"
 +
| 2.1875"
 +
| 2.500"
 +
| 6¼"
 +
| 5.154"
 +
| 6½"
 +
| 3⅞"
 +
| 6.872"
 +
| 7"
 +
| 5"
 
|-
 
|-
|#10||24 13/16”||15 3/4”||33 7/8”
+
| #6
|-
+
| 0.750"
|#11||27 5/8”||17 1/2”||37 3/4”
+
| 4.50"
 +
| 2.6250"
 +
| 3.000"
 +
| 12"
 +
| 6.185"
 +
| 7¾"
 +
| 4⅝"
 +
| 8.247"
 +
| 8¼"
 +
| 6"
 +
|- style="text-align:left;"
 +
| colspan="16" | d = Bar diameter </br>D = Finished bend diameter </br>D = 4d, (#4 & #5 epoxy or uncoated bars) </br>D = 6d, (#4 &5 galvanized bars & #6 bars) &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; H = R – ½ D (sin 45°) + 6d (sin 45°)</br>r = radius to outer edge of bar D/2 + d/2 &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; R = radius to outer edge of bar = r + d/2
 +
|- style="text-align:left; background-color:#ffffcc;"
 +
| colspan="16" | <span style="color:#01BF27"><sup>'''a'''</sup></span>  #4g & #5g represent galvanized bars. </br>&nbsp;&nbsp; #4 & #5 represent uncoated and epoxy bars. </br>&nbsp;&nbsp; #6 represent uncoated, epoxy and galvanized bars.
 
|}
 
|}
  
:C = Length along centerline of bar.
+
'''Bend Deductions:'''
:D (#3 thru #8) = 6d, D(#9 thru #11) = 8d  Above tables only.
 
:Deduct (all above angles except 90°) * = 2M - C or Deduct (90° Only) *  = 2R - C
 
  
:M (all above angles except 90°) = R tan (<math>\angle</math>/2) or M (90° Only) = R
+
Bend Deductions are provided in the table below. For 135° and 180° stirrup hooks the bend deduction is already included in the A or G dimension. Do not subtract the bend deduction from the A or G dimension for 135° and 180° stirrup hooks.
  
:For additional coding and information see preceding page.
+
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:center;"
 +
|- style="text-align:center; background-color:white;"
 +
| colspan="16" | [[image:Stirrup Pin Bend Shapes 002.png|center]]
 +
|- style="font-weight:bold; background-color:#c0c0c0;"
 +
| rowspan="2" | Bar Size
 +
| rowspan="2" | d
 +
| rowspan="2" colspan="2" | D
 +
| rowspan="2" colspan="2" | r
 +
| rowspan="2" | R
 +
| colspan="3" | Bend Angle V = 30°
 +
| colspan="3" | Bend Angle V = 45°
 +
| colspan="3" | Bend Angle V = 60°
 +
|- style="font-weight:bold; background-color:#c0c0c0;"
 +
| M
 +
| C
 +
| Deduct
 +
| M
 +
| C
 +
| Deduct
 +
| M
 +
| C
 +
| Deduct
 +
|-
 +
| #4
 +
| 0.500"
 +
| colspan="2" | 2.00"
 +
| colspan="2" | 1.250"
 +
| 1.500"
 +
| 0.402"
 +
| 0.654"
 +
| 0.149"
 +
| 0.621"
 +
| 0.982"
 +
| 0.261"
 +
| 0.866"
 +
| 1.309"
 +
| 0.423"
 +
|- style="background-color:#ffffcc;"
 +
| #4g<span style="color:#01BF27"><sup>'''a'''</sup></span>
 +
| 0.500"
 +
| colspan="2" | 3.00"
 +
| colspan="2" | 1.750"
 +
| 2.000"
 +
| 0.536"
 +
| 0.916"
 +
| 0.155"
 +
| 0.828"
 +
| 1.374"
 +
| 0.282"
 +
| 1.155"
 +
| 1.833"
 +
| 0.477"
 +
|-
 +
| #5
 +
| 0.625"
 +
| colspan="2" | 2.50"
 +
| colspan="2" | 1.563"
 +
| 1.875"
 +
| 0.502"
 +
| 0.818"
 +
| 0.187"
 +
| 0.777"
 +
| 1.227"
 +
| 0.326"
 +
| 1.083"
 +
| 1.636"
 +
| 0.529"
 +
|- style="background-color:#ffffcc;"
 +
| #5g<span style="color:#01BF27"><sup>'''a'''</sup></span>
 +
| 0.625"
 +
| colspan="2" | 3.75"
 +
| colspan="2" | 2.188"
 +
| 2.500"
 +
| 0.670"
 +
| 1.145"
 +
| 0.194"
 +
| 1.036"
 +
| 1.718"
 +
| 0.353"
 +
| 1.443"
 +
| 2.291"
 +
| 0.596"
 +
|-
 +
| #6
 +
| 0.750"
 +
| colspan="2" | 4.50"
 +
| colspan="2" | 2.625"
 +
| 3.000"
 +
| 0.804"
 +
| 1.374"
 +
| 0.233"
 +
| 1.243"
 +
| 2.062"
 +
| 0.424"
 +
| 1.732"
 +
| 2.749"
 +
| 0.715"
 +
|- style="font-weight:bold; background-color:#c0c0c0;"
 +
| rowspan="2" | Bar Size
 +
| colspan="6" | Bend Angle V = 90°
 +
| colspan="3" | Bend Angle V = 120°
 +
| colspan="3" | Bend Angle V = 135°
 +
| colspan="3" | Bend Angle V = 150°
 +
|- style="font-weight:bold; background-color:#c0c0c0;"
 +
| colspan="2" | R
 +
| colspan="2" | C
 +
| colspan="2" | Deduct
 +
| M
 +
| C
 +
| Deduct
 +
| M
 +
| C
 +
| Deduct
 +
| M
 +
| C
 +
| Deduct
 +
|-
 +
| #4
 +
| colspan="2" | 1.500"
 +
| colspan="2" | 1.963"
 +
| colspan="2" | 1.037"
 +
| 2.598"
 +
| 2.618"
 +
| 2.578"
 +
| 3.621"
 +
| 2.945"
 +
| 4.297"
 +
| 5.598"
 +
| 3.272"
 +
| 7.924"
 +
|- style="background-color:#ffffcc;"
 +
| #4g<span style="color:#01BF27"><sup>'''a'''</sup></span>
 +
| colspan="2" | 2.000"
 +
| colspan="2" | 2.749"
 +
| colspan="2" | 1.251"
 +
| 3.464"
 +
| 3.665"
 +
| 3.263"
 +
| 4.828"
 +
| 4.123"
 +
| 5.534"
 +
| 7.464"
 +
| 4.581"
 +
| 10.347"
 +
|-
 +
| #5
 +
| colspan="2" | 1.875"
 +
| colspan="2" | 2.454"
 +
| colspan="2" | 1.296"
 +
| 3.248"
 +
| 3.272"
 +
| 3.223"
 +
| 4.527"
 +
| 3.682"
 +
| 5.372"
 +
| 6.998"
 +
| 4.091"
 +
| 9.905"
 +
|- style="background-color:#ffffcc;"
 +
| #5g<span style="color:#01BF27"><sup>'''a'''</sup></span>
 +
| colspan="2" | 2.500"
 +
| colspan="2" | 3.436"
 +
| colspan="2" | 1.564"
 +
| 4.330"
 +
| 4.581"
 +
| 4.079"
 +
| 6.036"
 +
| 5.154"
 +
| 6.917"
 +
| 9.330"
 +
| 5.727"
 +
| 12.933"
 +
|-
 +
| #6
 +
| colspan="2" | 3.000"
 +
| colspan="2" | 4.123"
 +
| colspan="2" | 1.877"
 +
| 5.196"
 +
| 5.498"
 +
| 4.895"
 +
| 7.243"
 +
| 6.185"
 +
| 8.300"
 +
| 11.196"
 +
| 6.872"
 +
| 15.520"
 +
|- style="text-align:left;"
 +
| colspan="16" | d = Bar diameter &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; D = Finished bend diameter </br>D = 4d, (#4 & #5 epoxy or uncoated bars) </br>D = 6d, (#4 &5 galvanized bars & #6 bars)</br>Deduct = 2M – C &nbsp;&nbsp; (All angles) &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Deduct = 2R – C  &nbsp;&nbsp; (90° only) </br>M = R(Tan V/2) &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (All angles) &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; M = R &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (90° only) </br>r = radius to centerline of bar = D/2 + d/2 &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; R = radius to outer edge of bar = r + d/2
 +
|- style="text-align:left; background-color:#ffffcc;"
 +
| colspan="16" | <span style="color:#01BF27"><sup>'''a'''</sup></span>  #4g & #5g represent galvanized bars. </br>&nbsp;&nbsp; #4 & #5 represent uncoated and epoxy bars. </br>&nbsp;&nbsp; #6 represent uncoated, epoxy and galvanized bars.
 +
|}
  
:'''(*) Do not deduct * for a bend where A or G is taken from CRSI Manual of Standard Practice'''
+
'''Example Length Calculations for a Stirrup Pin Bend Shape:'''  
  
{| border="0" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="5" align="center" style="text-align:center"
+
{|  
|+'''Table for Figuring Reinforcing Bar Lengths (Stirrup Hooks)'''
 
|[[Image:751.5 90 degree stirrup hook.gif]]||[[Image:751.5 135 degree stirrup hook.gif]]
 
 
|-
 
|-
|<math>\,90^\circ</math>||<math>\,135^\circ</math>
+
| colspan="4" | Uncoated #4 stirrup with two 90° bends:
|}
+
|-
{| border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="1" align="center" style="text-align:center"
+
| style="text-align:right;" | 135° Hooks A & G
 +
| =
 +
| style="text-align:center;" | 2(4½")
 +
| <span style="color:#01BF27">''1<sup>st</sup> table''</span>
 +
| rowspan="9" | [[image:Shape31S example.png|center|]]
 +
|-
 +
| style="text-align:right;" | B
 +
| =
 +
| style="text-align:center;" | 2'-6"
 +
|
 +
|-
 +
| style="text-align:right;" | C
 +
| =
 +
| style="text-align:center;" | 3'-0"
 +
|
 +
|-
 +
| style="text-align:right;" | D
 +
| =
 +
| style="text-align:center;" | <u>&nbsp; 2'-6" &nbsp;</u>
 +
|
 +
|-
 +
| style="text-align:right;" | '''Nominal Length'''
 +
| =
 +
| style="text-align:center" | 8'-9"
 +
|
 
|-
 
|-
!colspan="5"|STIRRUP HOOK DIMENSIONS (*)
+
| style="text-align:right;" | 90° Bend Deducts
 +
| =
 +
| style="text-align:center" | <u>- 2(1.037")</u>
 +
| <span style="color:#01BF27">''2nd table''</span>
 
|-
 
|-
!colspan="5"|GRADE 40 - 50 - 60 ksi
+
| style="text-align:right;" | '''Actual Length'''
 +
| =
 +
| style="text-align:center; background-color:#FFF;" | 8'-6.926"=
 +
| '''8'-7"''' <span style="color:#01BF27">*</span>
 
|-
 
|-
!rowspan="2"|BAR SIZE
+
| colspan="4" style="text-align:center;" | <span style="color:#01BF27">''* Rounded to nearest inch''</span>
!rowspan="2"|D (inch)
+
|}
!<math>\,90^\circ</math> Hook
+
 
!colspan="2"|<math>\,135^\circ</math> Hook
+
====751.5.9.2.8 Development and Lap Splices====
 +
 
 +
<center>
 +
 
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
 +
|+
 +
!style="background:#BEBEBE" align="center"|Development and Lap Splice Table of Contents
 
|-
 
|-
!Hook A or G||Hook A or G||Approx. H
+
|1. [[#751.5.9.2.8.1 Development and Lap Splice General|General]]
 
|-
 
|-
|#4||2”||4 1/2”||4 1/2”||3”
+
|2. [[#751.5.9.2.8.2 Development and Lap Splices of Deformed Bars in Tension|Development and Lap Splices of Deformed Bars in Tension]]
 
|-
 
|-
|#5||2 1/2”||6”||5 1/2”||3 3/4”
+
|3. [[#751.5.9.2.8.3 Development and Lap Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression|Development and Lap Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression]]
 
|-
 
|-
|#6||4 1/2”||12”||8”||4 1/2”
+
|4. [[#751.5.9.2.8.4 Development of Standard Hooked Deformed Bars in Tension|Development of Standard Hooked Deformed Bars in Tension]]
 
|}
 
|}
<center>(*) See CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.</center>
+
</center>
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.9.2.8.1 Development and Lap Splice General=====
  
== 751.5.11 Development and Splicing of Reinforcement ==
+
'''Development of Tension Reinforcement '''
  
=== 751.5.11.1 General ===
+
Development lengths for tension reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.2.1.
  
'''Development of Tension Reinforcement'''
+
Excess reinforcement modification factor (''λ<sub>er</sub>'') of LRFD 5.10.8.2.1c shall only be used in situations where development length without this factor is difficult to attain. All other modification factors shall be used.  
 
Development lengths for tension reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.11.2.1.  Development length modification factors described in second and third bulleted paragraphs of LRFD 5.11.2.1.3 shall only be used in situations where development length without these factors is difficult to attain. All other modification factors shown shall be used.
 
  
Development lengths for tension reinforcement have been tabulated on the following pages and include the modification factors except those described above.
+
Temperature and shrinkage reinforcement are assumed to fully develop the specified yield stresses. Therefore the development length shall not be reduced by ''λ<sub>er</sub>'' .  
  
'''Lap Splices of Tension Reinforcement'''
+
Development lengths for tension reinforcement have been tabulated on the following pages and include the modification factors except as described above.
  
Lap splices of reinforcement in tension shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.11.5.2.1 and 5.11.5.3.1.  Class C splices are preferred when possible, however it is permissible to use Class A or B when physical space is limited. The designer shall satisfy LRFD Table 5.11.5.3.1-1 when using Class A or B splices. It should be noted that "<math>\, A_s\ required</math>" is based on the stress encountered at the splice location, which is not necessarily the maximum stress used to design the reinforcement.
+
'''Lap Splices of Tension Reinforcement '''
  
Temperature and shrinkage reinforcement is assumed to fully develop the specified yield stresses. Therefore the development length shall not be reduced by <math>\, (A_s\ required)/(A_s\ supplied)</math>.
+
Lap splice lengths for tension reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.4.2a and 5.10.8.4.3a. Class B splices are preferred when possible, however it is permissible to use Class A when physical space is limited and Class A requirements are met. It should be noted that "''required by analysis''" of the Class A requirements is based on the stress encountered at the splice location, which is not necessarily the maximum stress used to design the reinforcement. Lap splice lengths for tension reinforcement have been tabulated on the following pages and include the development length modification factors as described above.  
  
Splice lengths for tension reinforcement have been tabulated on the following pages and include the development length modifications as described above.
+
'''Development of Tension Hooks '''
  
'''Development of Tension Hooks'''
+
Development lengths of tension hooks shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.2.4.
  
Development of tension hooks shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.11.2.4. Hook length modification factors described in the second and third bulleted paragraphs of LRFD 5.11.2.4.2 shall only be used in situations where hook length without these factors is difficult to attain. All other modification factors shown shall be used.
+
Modification factors for reinforcement confinement (''λ<sub>rc2</sub>'') and excess reinforcement (''λ<sub>er</sub>'') of LRFD 5.10.8.2.4b shall only be used in situations where development length without these factors is difficult to attain. All other modification factors shall be used.  
  
Development lengths of tension hooks have been tabulated on the following pages and include the modification factors except those described above.
+
Development lengths of tension hooks have been tabulated on the following pages and include the modification factors except as described above.  
 
   
 
   
'''Development of Compression Reinforcement'''
+
'''Development of Compression Reinforcement '''
 +
 
 +
Development lengths for compression reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.2.2.
  
Development lengths for compression reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.11.2.2.  Development length modification factors described in LRFD 5.11.2.2.2 shall only be used in situations where development length without these factors is difficult to attain. All other modification factors shown shall be used.
+
Excess reinforcement modification factor (''λ<sub>er</sub>'') of LRFD 5.10.8.2.2b shall only be used in situations where development length without this factor is difficult to attain. All other modification factors shall be used.  
  
Development lengths for compression reinforcement have been tabulated on the following pages and include the modification factors except those described above.
+
Development lengths for compression reinforcement have been tabulated on the following pages and include the modification factors except as described above.
  
'''Lap Splices of Compression Reinforcement'''
+
'''Lap Splices of Compression Reinforcement '''
  
Lap splices of reinforcement in compression shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.11.5.2.1 and 5.11.5.5.1.
+
Lap splices lengths for compression reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.4.2a and 5.10.8.4.5a.  
  
 
Splice lengths for compression reinforcement have been tabulated on the following pages.
 
Splice lengths for compression reinforcement have been tabulated on the following pages.
  
'''Mechanical Bar Splices'''
+
=====751.5.9.2.8.2 Development and Lap Splices of Deformed Bars in Tension=====
 +
 
 +
The values in the following table are based on Grade 60 bars and may be adjusted for yield strengths up to 100 ksi. The final step in the table adjusts values for other material strengths. The values for Grade 40 bars are 40/60 of the values in the table (not less than 12 in.), and values for 100 ksi bars are 100/60 of the values in the table.
 
   
 
   
Mechanical bar splices may be used in situations where it is not possible or feasible to use lap splices. Mechanical bar splices shall meet the criteria of LRFD 5.11.5.2.2. Refer to the manufacturers literature for more information on the design of mechanical bar splices.
+
[[image:751.5.9.2.7.2 step 1 through 5.jpg|center|950px]]
  
=== 751.5.11.2 Development and Tension Lap Splice Lengths – Top Bars (<math>\,F_y</math> = 60 ksi)===
+
[[image:751.5.9.2.7.2 step 6 2023.jpg|center|950px]]
  
<center>[[Image:751.5 development and tension lap splice lengths-top bars.gif|800px]]</center>
+
[[image:751.5.9.2.7.2 step 7 2023.jpg|center|950px]]
  
:Top bar is horizontal reinforcement placed so that more than 12” of fresh concrete is cast below the reinforcement.
+
=====751.5.9.2.8.3 Development and Lap Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression=====
  
:Class A splice = 1.0 <math>\,ld</math>, Class B splice = 1.3 <math>\,ld</math>, Class C splice =1.7 <math>\,ld</math>
+
The values in the following table are based on Grade 60 bars. Development lengths may be adjusted for yield strengths up to 100 ksi. Lap splice lengths for yield strengths greater than 60 ksi up to 100 ksi shall be calculated in accordance LRFD 5.10.8.4.5a. The final step in the table adjusts values for other material strengths. The values for Grade 40 bars are 40/60 of the values in the table (not less than 8 in. for development length and 12 in. for lap splice length).  
 
   
 
   
:Use development and tension lap splices of <math>\, f'_c</math> = 4 ksi for concrete strengths greater than 4 ksi.
+
[[image:751.5.9.2.7.3.jpg|center|950px]]
  
=== 751.5.11.3 Development and Tension Lap Splice Lengths – Other Than Top Bars (<math>\,F_y</math> = 60 ksi) ===
+
=====751.5.9.2.8.4 Development of Standard Hooked Deformed Bars in Tension=====
  
<center>[[Image:751.5 development and tension lap splice lengths-other than top bars.gif|800px]]</center>
+
The development length (''L<sub>dh</sub>'') is measured from the critical section to the outside edge of the hook.
  
:Class A splice = 1.0 <math>\,ld</math>, Class B splice = 1.3 <math>\,ld</math>, Class C splice =1.7 <math>\,ld</math>
+
The values in the following table are based on Grade 60 bars and may be adjusted for yield strengths up to 100 ksi. The final step in the table adjusts values for other material strengths. The values for Grade 40 bars are 40/60 of the values in the table (not less than 8d<sub>b</sub>, 6 in. or l<sub>dh-edge</sub>), and values for 100 ksi bars are 100/60 of the values in the table.  
  
:Use development and tension lap splices of <math>\, f'_c</math> = 4 ksi for concrete strengths greater than 4 ksi.
+
[[image:751.5.9.2.7.4 steps 1-5 2023.jpg|center|850px]]
  
=== 751.5.11.4 Development and Lap Splice Lengths - Bars in Compression  (<math>\,F_y</math> = 60 ksi)===
+
[[image:751.5.9.2.7.4 steps 6 and 7.jpg|center|850px]]
  
<center>[[Image:751.5 development and tension lap splice lengths-bars in compression.gif|800px]]</center>
+
====751.5.9.2.9 Mechanical Bar Splices ====
 +
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:10px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="290px" align="right"
 +
|-
 +
|[https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/MBS_example.pdf ''' Mechanical Bar Splice Example Details''']
 +
|}
  
# Development length for bar with spirals, <math>\,ld_{spiral}</math>, should be used if reinforcement is enclosed in a spiral of not less than 1/4" diameter and no more than 4” pitch. See LRFD 5.11.2.2 for special conditions.
+
=====751.5.9.2.9.1 General =====
# Lap splices for #14 and #18 bars are not permitted except as column to footing dowels.
+
Mechanical bar splices (MBS) may be used in situations where it is not possible or practical to use lap splices. [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=11 Sec 706] and [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=11 Sec 710] require contractors to provide certification that MBS systems meet the yield requirement for overstrength of LRFD 5.10.8.4.2b and therefore there is no design required for these systems. However practical design may require specificity of a particular type of MBS, i.e. a device for restrictive applications determined on a case-by-case basis. See Structural Project Manager or Structural Liaison Engineer.
# Lap splice length with ties should be used when the ties along the splice have an effective area not less than 0.15 percent of the product of the thickness of the compression component times the tie spacing.
 
  
:All values are for splices with the same size bars. For different size bars, use the higher value of either the development length of the larger bar or the splice length of the smaller bar.
+
=====751.5.9.2.9.2 Details =====
 +
MBS shall be shown at all locations where required and contrasted to distinguish them from the reinforcing bars. MBS locations shall identify a unique combination of bar marks. Identifying combination and quantity shall follow standard detailing practice, e.g. 6-MBS H106-H104 or MBS H106-H104 (Typ.). Space limitations on plans may require use of footnotes. MBS shall be specified as shown indicating bar marks to be spliced.
 +
 +
[[image:751.5.9.2.8.2 details.jpg|center|900px]]
  
=== 751.5.11.5 Development of Standard Hooks in Tension, <math>\,L_{dh}</math> (<math>\,F_y</math> = 60 ksi) ===
+
<u>Exception:</u> MBS for bridge approach slabs shall be specified generally since bars are not uniquely identified. Good detailing practice requires that construction joints and estimated quantities of MBS systems be shown. The standard drawings for bridge approach slabs shall be modified to show staged construction.
 +
 +
[[image:751.5.9.2.8.2 section bb.jpg|center|800px]]
  
The development length, <math>\,L_{dh}</math>, is measured from the critical section to the outside edge of the hook. The tabulated values are valid for both epoxy and uncoated hooks.
+
=====751.5.9.2.9.3 Estimated Quantities =====
 +
If the overall quantity of mechanical bar splices required for a structure is 50 or greater not including any required in bridge approach slabs, then mechanical bar splices will be paid for separately and shown in all quantities tables otherwise their cost shall be covered by the contract unit price for other items.  
  
<center>[[Image:751.5 development of standard hooks in tension.gif|800px]]</center>
+
MBS that are required in bridge approach slabs will not be directly paid for but instead the cost will be considered completely covered by the contract unit price for the bridge approach slab.  
  
:'''Case A''' - For #11 bar and smaller, side cover (normal to plane of hook) less than 2 1/2” and for a 90° hook with cover on the hook extension less than 2”.
+
=====751.5.9.2.9.4 Notes =====
 +
See [https://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=751.50_Standard_Detailing_Notes#A3._All_Structures EPG 751.50 A3] for appropriate note and guidance for use.
  
:'''Case B''' - For #11 bar and smaller, side cover (normal to plane of hook) greater than 2 1/2” and for a 90° hook with cover on the hook extension 2” or greater.
+
===751.5.9.3 Structural Steel ===
 +
<center>
  
# See Structural Project Manager before using #14 or #18 hook.  
+
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:left"
# When detailing near a free edge or construction joint, the larger development length value from the minimum <math>\,L_{dh}</math> category or the value from the applicable case given in the table shall govern.
+
|+
 +
!style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan ="3"|Structural Steel Table of Contents
 +
|-
 +
|1. [[#751.5.9.3.1 Welding|Welding]] ||2. [[#751.5.9.3.2 Notch Toughness|Notch Toughness]]||3. [[#751.5.9.3.3 Fracture Control Plan (FCP) *|Fracture Control Plan]]
 +
|}
 +
</center>
 +
 
 +
====751.5.9.3.1 Welding ====
 +
 
 +
=====751.5.9.3.1.1 General=====
 +
All welding shall be detailed in accordance with ANSI / AASHTO / AWS D1.5, Bridge Welding Code.  
  
{| border="0" cellpadding="3" cellspacing="1" align="center" style="text-aling:center"
+
The following chart shows the suggested minimum weld sizes. However, these may be increased to satisfy design requirements.
  
| rowspan="4"|[[Image:751.5 details near free edge or const joint.gif]]
+
<center>
| rowspan="4" width="40px"|&nbsp;
+
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
|[[Image:751.5 hooked-bar details for development of std hooks.gif]]
+
|+
 +
!Minimum Fillet Weld !!Material thickness of thicker part joined
 
|-
 
|-
|(1) = <math>\,4d_b</math> (#3 thru #8)
+
|1/4" ||t"<math>\le</math> 3/4"
 
|-
 
|-
|(1) = <math>\,5d_b</math> (#9, #10 and #11)
+
|5/16" ||3/4" < t <math>\le</math> 2 1/2"
 
|-
 
|-
|(1) = <math>\,6d_b</math> (#14 and #18)
+
|1/2" ||t > 2 1/2"
|-
 
!DETAILS NEAR FREE EDGE <br\>OR CONSTRUCTION JOINT||&nbsp;||HOOKED-BAR DETAILS FOR<br\>DEVELOPMENT OF STANDARD HOOKS
 
 
|}
 
|}
 +
</center>
 +
 +
The factored resistance of a welded connection is governed by the resistance of the base metal or the deposited weld metal.
  
=== 751.5.11.6 Development of uncoated Grade 40 deformed bars in tension, <math>\,L_d</math> (LRFD 5.11.2.1) ===
+
The factored resistance of the base metal is:
  
<center>[[Image:751.5 development of non-epoxy coated grade 40 deformed bars in tension.gif|800px]]</center>
+
:''R<sub>r</sub> = φ<sub>v</sub>(0.58A<sub>g</sub>F<sub>y</sub>)''
  
:Top bars are placed such that more than 12” of concrete is cast below the reinforcement.
+
Where:  
 +
:''φ<sub>v</sub>'' = 1.0 (Resistance factor for shear)
 +
:''A<sub>g</sub>'' = gross area of smaller connection element
 +
:''F<sub>y</sub>''= specified minimum yield strength of connection element
  
=== 751.5.11.7 Minimum lap length for uncoated Grade 40 tension lap splices, <math>\,L_{lap}</math> (LRFD 5.11.5)===
+
Allowable shear load of the base metal = ''R<sub>r</sub>A<sub>g</sub>''
  
<center>[[Image:751.5 minimum lap length for non-epoxy coated grade 40 tension lap splices.gif|750px]]</center>
+
The factored resistance of the deposited weld metal is:  
  
:Note: Design plan details shall indicate splice length.
+
:''R<sub>r</sub> = 0.6φ<sub>e2</sub>F<sub>exx</sub>''
  
:Top bars are placed such that more than 12” of concrete is cast below the reinforcement.
+
Where:  
 +
:''φ<sub>e2</sub>'' = 0.8 (Resistance factor for fillet weld material)
 +
:''F<sub>exx</sub>'' = tensile strength of electrode classification.  
  
== 751.5.12 Miscellaneous ==
+
Allowable Shear Loads for Fillet Welds = ''(R<sub>r</sub>)(0.707)(weldsize)''
  
=== 751.5.12.1 Notch Toughness ===
+
<center>
 +
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align:center"
 +
|+
 +
!Size of Fillet Weld (Inch)!!width=250| Allowable Factored Shear Loads For Fillet Welds *(kips per linear inch)
 +
|-
 +
|1/4|| 5.939
 +
|-
 +
|5/16|| 7.424
 +
|-
 +
|3/8|| 8.908
 +
|-
 +
|1/2|| 11.878
 +
|-
 +
|5/8|| 14.847
 +
|-
 +
|3/4|| 17.816
 +
|-
 +
|7/8|| 20.786
 +
|-
 +
|1|| 23.755
 +
|-
 +
|colspan="2" align="left"|'''*''' based on ''F<sub>exx</sub>'' = 70 ksi
 +
|}
 +
</center>
  
'''Wide Flange Beams Structures:'''
+
=====751.5.9.3.1.2 Minimum Length of Fillet Weld =====
 +
The minimum effective length of a fillet weld shall be four times its size and in no case less than 1½ inches.
  
Proper notes to be placed on plans.
+
=====751.5.9.3.1.3 Maximum Sizes of Fillet Welds =====
 +
 +
[[image:751.5.9.3.1.3.jpg|center|550px]]
 +
  
 +
=====751.5.9.3.1.4 Standard Welding Symbols and Application of Symbols=====
  
<div id="Plate Girder Example"></div>
+
[[image:751.5.9.3.1.4.1.jpg|center|920px]]
'''Plate Girder Structures:'''
+
[[image:751.5.9.3.1.4.2.jpg|center|920px]]
 +
::::'''*''' Normally not used except for flush or upset welds
 +
[[image:751.5.9.3.1.4.3.jpg|center|920px]]
 +
[[image:751.5.9.3.1.4.4.jpg|center|920px]]
 +
[[image:751.5.9.3.1.4.5.jpg|center|920px]]
 +
[[image:751.5.9.3.1.4.6.jpg|center|920px]]
 +
[[image:751.5.9.3.1.4.7.jpg|center|920px]]
 +
[[image:751.5.9.3.1.4.8.jpg|center|920px]]
 +
[[image:751.5.9.3.1.4.9.jpg|center|920px]]
 +
[[image:751.5.9.3.1.4.10.jpg|center|920px]]
 +
[[image:751.5.9.3.1.4.11.jpg|center|920px]]
 +
[[image:751.5.9.3.1.4.12.jpg|center|920px]]
 +
[[image:751.5.9.3.1.4.13.jpg|center|920px]]
 +
[[image:751.5.9.3.1.4.14.jpg|center|920px]]
  
Proper notes to be placed on plans.  Typical examples for location of  *** on plans for tension flange only of plate girders are shown below.
 
  
<center>[[Image:751.5 notch toughness requirements.gif]]</center>
 
  
Other special locations for *** will be for tension flanges of floor beams in straight girder bridges, and for top and bottom flanges of floor beams in curved girder bridges.
+
   
 +
====751.5.9.3.2 Notch Toughness ====
 +
'''Wide Flange Beam Structures: '''
 +
Proper notes to be placed on plans.  
  
When any splices are located in a moment area, all flange and web splice plates for the bridge are subject to notch toughness requirements. Show  *** with detail of flange splice plate
+
'''Plate Girder Structures: '''
 +
Proper notes to be placed on plans. Typical examples for location of *** on plans for tension flange only of plate girders are shown below.
 +
 +
[[image:751.5.9.3.2.jpg|center|850px]]
  
=== 751.5.12.2 Fracture Control Plan (FCP) * ===
+
Other special locations for *** will be for tension flanges of floor beams in straight girder bridges, and for top and bottom flanges of floor beams in curved girder bridges.  
  
Fracture Control Plan (FCP), Section 12 of ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5-95, shall apply to fracture critical nonredundant member.
+
When any splices are located in a moment area, all flange and web splice plates for the bridge are subject to notch toughness requirements. Show *** with detail of flange splice plate.  
  
Main elements and components whose failure is expected to cause the collapse of the bridge shall be designated as failure-critical and the associated structural system as non-redundant.  Examples of nonredundant members are flange and web plates in one or two girder bridges, main one-element truss members and hanger plates.
+
====751.5.9.3.3 Fracture Control Plan (FCP) ====
 +
Fracture Control Plan (FCP), Section 12 of ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5-95, Bridge Welding Code, shall apply to fracture critical non-redundant member.  
  
For non-redundant steel structures or members, the designer shall determine which, if any, component is a Fracture Critical Member (FCM).  The location of all FCMs shall be clearly delineated on the design plans.
+
Main elements and components whose failure is expected to cause the collapse of the bridge shall be designated as failure-critical, and the associated structural system as non-redundant. Examples of non-redundant members are flange and web plates in one or two girder bridges, main one-element truss members and hanger plates.  
  
FCMs are defined as tension members or tension components of bending members (including those subject to reversal of stress), the failure of which would be expected to result in collapse of the bridge. The designation "FCM" shall mean fracture critical member or member component. Members and components that are not subject to tension stress under any condition of live load are not fracture critical.
+
For non-redundant steel structures or members, the designer shall determine which, if any, component is a Fracture Critical Member (FCM). The location of all FCMs shall be clearly delineated on the design plans.  
  
Any attachment welded to a tension zone of an FCM shall be considered an FCM when any dimension of the attachment exceeds 4 inches in the direction parallel to the calculated tensile stress in the FCM. Attachments designated FCM shall meet all requirements of FCP. 
+
FCMs are defined as tension members or tension components of bending members (including those subject to reversal of stress), the failure of which would be expected to result in collapse of the bridge. The designation "FCM" shall mean fracture critical member or member component. Members and components that are not subject to tension stress under any condition of live load are not fracture critical.  
All welds to FCMs shall be considered fracture critical and shall conform to the requirements of FCP. Welds to compression members or compression area of bending member are not fracture critical.  
 
  
FCMs shall be fabricated in accordance with FCP. Material for FCM shall be tested in accordance with AASHTO T243 (ASTM A673), Frequency P.  Material for components not designed as fracture critical shall be tested in conformance with AASHTO T243 (ASTM A673), Frequency H.  [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/Sec0712.pdf Sec 712] and FCM Special Provisions will include additional requirement for material, welding, inspection and manufacturing.
+
Any attachment welded to a tension zone of an FCM shall be considered an FCM when any dimension of the attachment exceeds 4 inches in the direction parallel to the calculated tensile stress in the FCM. Attachments designated FCM shall meet all requirements of FCP. All welds to FCMs shall be considered fracture critical and shall conform to the requirements of FCP. Welds to compression members or the compression area of bending members are not fracture critical.  
 
 
Notes to be placed on contract plans are as follows:
 
:General Notes:
 
::This structure contains non-redundant Fracture Critical
 
::Members (FCM).  See Special Provisions for FCM requirements.
 
  
:Notes for Superstructure - Steel Spans
+
FCMs shall be fabricated in accordance with FCP. Material for FCM shall be tested in accordance with AASHTO T243 (ASTM A673), Frequency P. Material for components not designed as fracture critical shall be tested in conformance with AASHTO T243 (ASTM A673), Frequency H. [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=11 Sec 712] and FCM Special Provisions will include additional requirement for material, welding, inspection and manufacturing.  
::(Place FCM next to the member or member components)
 
::(Place following notes near the FCM)
 
::FCM indicates Fracture Critical Member, see Special Provisions.  
 
::The welds for FCM's are controlled by ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5-95.
 
  
The notes may replace the notch toughness requirement now being usedIf there are components requiring notch toughness that are not FCM's on the same plans as FCM's both notes will be necessary.
+
Notes EPG 751.50 Miscellaneous A5.1 and  H1.23b Structural Steel for Wide Flange Beams and Plate Girder Structures  shall be placed on contract plans as required.
  
'''(*) The designation "FCP" shall mean fracture control plan and shall include all provisions of Section 12 AASHTO/AWS Fracture Control Plan (FCP) for Nonredundant Members of ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5-95, Bridge Welding Code.'''
 
  
  
  
 
[[Category:751 LRFD Bridge Design Guidelines|751.05]]
 
[[Category:751 LRFD Bridge Design Guidelines|751.05]]

Latest revision as of 14:23, 19 September 2024

Example Bridge Plans


The scope of this article is to provide preferred detailing practices for in-house structural drawings in order to reduce revisions based solely on personal preferences.

Contents

751.5.1 General Detailing

751.5.1.1 Drafting Standards

Drafting Standards Table of Contents
1. CADD Levels 2. Line Conventions 3. Annotation 4. Reference Notes
5. Sections 6. Hatching 7. Breaks 8. Surfaces
9. Text Height 10. Number Format 11. Span Ranges

751.5.1.1.1 CADD Levels

All bridge plans shall be drawn in OpenRoads Designer (ORD) and shall have the following levels, colors and line weights:

751.5.1.1 CAD 2021.jpg
Note: Colors represent line weights:
Color 7 magenta = Weight 0 and 1
Color 5 yellow = Weight 2
Color 4 green = Weight 4
Color 1 gray = Weight 5
Color 2 red = Weight 7
Color 8 brown = Weight 12 (borders)
* Level overrides are used to print a plan sheet in black and white with some text and/or geometry printing in color. Turn on Level Overrides in View Attributes, then print the sheet in color.

751.5.1.1.2 Line Conventions

Reinforcing steel, except when sectioned, is shown by a single line. Centerlines are represented by a single dot between dashes. Hidden surfaces are represented by short dashed lines.

Construction joints are drawn using concrete object lines as shown.

751.5.1.1 joints.jpg

Water surfaces will be shown by broken or dashed lines as shown. A Water Level Cell is available under CADD Standards: Front Sheets.

751.5.1.1 water.jpg

Patterns representing the type of ground shall be placed under ground lines. Patterns may be placed using a cell (under CADD Standards: Front Sheets), or as area fill (under CADD Standards: Area Patterns). When using area fill, turn on Drop Pattern to prevent it from placing a line around the perimeter of the pattern. The examples shown below were placed using area fill.

800xp

751.5.1.1.3 Annotation

Objects are annotated with dimensions and leader notes placed as close to the object as possible, crossing a minimum number of lines, and are to be placed outside the object whenever possible.

Dimensions of angles between two objects shall be an arc dimension drawn with the center at the point of intersection of the objects except when 90°, then right angle square may be used.

Dimension lines shall be normal to extension lines whenever possible.

If the desired text of dimension lines will not fit clearly above and below the dimension line between extension lines, the arrows shall be placed outside the extension lines with the desired text placed on one side. If it is not possible to clearly place the desired text outside the extension lines, the text may be specified using a reference note (asterisk or (1), for example) or placed away from the dimension line using a leader note with its arrow attached to the center of the dimension line.

Arrows placed inside the extension lines should have a minimum clearance of approximately one arrow length between each arrow.

The leader line of leader notes should originate from the beginning or end of the text, and the text shall be left justified.

Arrows of leader notes shall typically touch the edge of the objects they point to. When designating a structural steel member, the leg the arrow points to should be the first value mentioned in the note.

Arrows of leader notes shall point to a tilde (~) placed inside the object when the note specifies work done to the surface of the object. A cell is available for this purpose under CADD Standards: General Annotation (Tilde for Leader Notes).

751.5.1.1.4 Reference Notes

Reference notes are used when there is insufficient space to clearly designate the required information in a dimension or leader note.

A reference note consists of an indicator located in the details and, at some other location on the sheet, the note specifying the required information, preceded by the indicator.

Indicators shall either be asterisks without parentheses or numbers with parentheses. Numbers are recommended when more than three reference notes are required on a single sheet.

* (1) Used for first required reference note
** (2) Used for second required reference note
*** (3) Used for third required reference note
(4) Used for fourth required reference note

Indicators on the same sheet shall be of sequential order without any omission in the order.

If a reference note indicator is only required in one detail, the reference note shall either be placed near the indicator in the detail or directly below the title of the detail.

If a reference note indicator is used for several details that are grouped close together, the reference note shall preferably be placed near the center of the group of details.

Multiple reference notes using asterisk indicators, when listed together, shall be in sequential order with the asterisks being right justified so the text of the notes starts at the same location.

If a reference note indicator is used for several details that are not grouped close together, the reference note shall be placed with the General Notes on that sheet. The Bridge Approach Slab Standard Drawings are a good example of this case. If the General Notes are organized into subheadings, all of the reference notes shall be listed under a Reference Notes subheading.

When several reference notes are required on a sheet but the notes vary by detail, the reference notes shall be located under a Reference Notes heading separate from the General Notes and grouped by detail using subheadings. The Precast Prestressed Panel Standard Drawings are a good example of this case.

751.5.1.1.5 Sections, Elevations and Detail Circles

Sections and elevations perpendicular to the stationing are typically shown looking ahead stationing, with the exception of End Bent No.1, which is shown looking back stationing.

Sections and elevations along (parallel to) the stationing are typically shown with back stationing on the left and ahead stationing on the right.

The location of sections and elevations within other details shall be shown in those details by placing short thick lines just outside the limits of the object or at the limits of a part of the object. Where, for the sake of clarity, it is necessary to show the direction of the view taken, arrows may be used at the ends of these lines and at right angles thereto. A reference letter shall be placed at each of these lines or arrows with these same letters being used in the title of the section or elevation (SECTION A-A). A Section Arrow cell is available under CADD Standards: General Annotation, as well as in other categories where section arrows are often used.

Detail circles are used around a portion of a detailed object that needs to be shown enlarged for the sake of clarity. Detail circles shall be annotated using a leader note such as “Detail A” followed by a reference letter with this same letter being used in the title of the enlarged detail (DETAIL A).

Reference letters shall not be enclosed in quotation marks (Detail A, not Detail “A”).

For all of the sheets pertaining to the same component of the structure (all of the End Bent No. 1 sheets), reference letters for sections and elevations shall be provided in alphabetical order as occurring on the plan sheets and reference letters for detail circles shall be provided in alphabetical order as occurring on the plan sheets.

If possible, place the section detail, elevation detail or enlarged detail on the same sheet as the detail showing the location of such details. If this is not possible, place the details on another sheet, and refer to that sheet with a note, such as “Work this sheet with Sheet No. x.”; OR “For Detail A, see Sheet No. x”.

751.5.1.1.6 Hatching

Sectional views cutting through concrete shall be hatched with the conventional dot and triangle hatching. Care shall be taken to avoid dense or crowded hatching, particularly for sections showing reinforcing steel. Use Concrete Areafill available in CADD Standards: Area Patterns, or use the Concrete Pattern Cluster cell, which is available in several categories.

Sectional views through reinforcing steel shall be shown solid. Bar size will likely need to be exaggerated for clarity. Use CADD Standard Reinforcing Steel (In Section), under Geometry.

Sectional views through structural steel shall be shown as parallel sloping line hatching. Use CADD Standard Steel Hatching, under Area Patterns. In special cases, for the sake of clarity, the sections through structural steel may be left open or shown solid.

Except for special cases, all miscellaneous materials such as joint filler, castings, lead plate, etc. shall have sectional views shown hatched with light parallel lines, evenly spaced and sloped 45 degrees (preferred) to the horizontal.

751.5.1.1.7 Breaks

Breaks may be used in views for sake of clarity. “Short break” lines should be drawn without excessive waving or zigzag movements, and are drawn with the same line type as the broken object. A loop of the same line type may be used in showing breaks in round objects such as columns. “Long break” lines should be drawn as a solid line with one zig-zag near the center. Multiple zig-zags may be used for greater distances. Always use the Long Break & Match Lines CADD Standard under Geometry, NOT the same line type as the broken object.

751.5.1.1.8 Surfaces

Sloped or curved surfaces shall not be shaded except for special cases.

751.5.1.1.9 Text Height

Small text used for notes, dimensions, leader notes and tabulated data shall be 1/8 inch tall. Small bold text used for subtitles and subheadings and for bench marks shall also be 1/8 inch tall. Medium text used for titles of notes, tables and details shall be 3/16 inch tall. Large text used for sheet titles shall be 1/4 inch tall. CADD Standards: General Annotation, along with Annotation Scale, will give the correct text heights for the chosen scale.

751.5.1.1.10 Span Ranges

Bridge spans are identified by their range using parentheses and the adjacent hyphenated bent numbers. For example, Span (1-2) would define the span between the first and second bents. The order of the bent numbers correlates with the view (“Span (4-3)” if Bent 4 is on the left). Spans shall be labeled near the middle of the span directly under the overall bridge length dimension, if shown; otherwise directly under the span dimension.

751.5.1.1 span.jpg

In details, the text used for labeling spans shall be all capitalized Small Bold text. Regular text shall be used in notes, with only the first letter being capitalized (Span 2-3).

751.5.1.2 Weights and Measures

Weights and Measures Table of Contents
1. General 2. Lengths 3. Series 4. Stationing
5. Elevations 6. Batter 7. Slopes 8. Temperatures

751.5.1.2.1 General

All weights and measures shall be in English units only. Dual units shall not be used.

In notes, units shall be completely spelled out (1/2 pound, 3 inches) except in cases of very lengthy units (50 ksi, 10 cfs) and for lengths when feet and inches are both required (9’-3”).

In dimensions, leader notes and tabulated data, unit symbols shall be used if available, otherwise unit abbreviations shall be used.

When used as an adjective in a note, weights or measures shall be hyphenated with the singular form of the appropriate unit or unit abbreviations (30-pound roofing felt, 6-inch lifts).

751.5.1.2.2 Lengths

Lengths two feet or greater shall be specified in feet and inches. Lengths less than two feet shall be specified in inches. Inches shall be reported in fractions not decimals (3/4 inch, not 0.75 inch; 2 1/2 inches, not 2.5 inches) except in the bill of reinforcing steel. In notes, there is no need to report zero inches. A zero is required in front of fractions when both foot and inch unit symbols are being used. See the following for examples:

751.5.1.2 lengths.jpg

In general, lengths shall be reported to the nearest 1/8 inch. Where close work is required, lengths for metals may be reported to the nearest 1/16, 1/32 or 1/64 inch. Substructure layout for horizontally curved bridges shall be reported to the nearest 1/16 inch if necessary. Haunch, deflection and camber shall be reported to the nearest 1/16 inch for steel structures, while haunch and camber shall be reported to the nearest 1/8 inch for concrete structures. Lengths for individual legs of shaped reinforcing bars shall be reported using ¼-inch increments. Lengths of straight reinforcing bars shall be reported using one-inch increments.

In notes, an attribute such as thickness shall follow the unit of measure if required for clarification. Typically, such attributes should not be required with dimensions and leader notes since clarity is obtained through the detail. See the following for examples:

751.5.1.2 attribute.jpg

Lengths listed in a series shall be separated using lowercase “x” in lieu of “by”. In notes, the unit of measure shall be placed at the end of the series of the same units with plurality based on the last length. One exception is that units are always required preceding attributes. The length attribute when required shall be reported last. See the following for examples:

751.5.1.2 series.jpg
751.5.1.2 multi line.jpg

751.5.1.2.3 Series

A dimension line shall be used to designate a series of items such as reinforcing bars or piles. The dimension line shall be placed between the outside limits of the series and the series designated as follows:

Designation of a Series of Items
Method When to Use Example
Quantity Only small quantity clearly shown and equally distributed across the entire width of the member 4-#7-H10
Quantity and Spacing Together exact spacing required 5 Piles @ 5'-9" cts.
start and end location fixed and the actual spacing of the required quantity is slightly less than a desired spacing 8-#6-H19 @ abt. 8" cts.
start and end location fixed and the actual spacing of the required quantity is not close to a desired spacing |__12-#6-D20__|
(Equally spaced)
Quantity & Spacing Separate series has variable spacing |__16-#5-K1 and K2__|
| (Spaced as shown) |
|__5 Spa. @ 6"|10 Spa. @ 8"__|
Spaced with Other when items are to be placed at same location of another series of items that already have spacing designated |__11-#5-K4__|
(Spaced with K1 and K2)
Spaced Elsewhere when series has already been designated in another detail, useful when multiple bar marks are involved |__#6-U-Bars__|
(Spa. as shown in Elevation)
A minimum of three items are required to be a series, otherwise designate using leader notes.
Always use the symbol @ and the abbreviations cts. and abt. All other words may be abbreviated if necessary for space in accordance with Abbreviations.
Show all reinforcement in sectional views. Show only outside bars of the series in plan and elevation views. Show all of the items for all other series (piles in a beam cap).

751.5.1.2.4 Stationing

Stations are points on the baseline at specified distances from the beginning point with 100 feet equaling one full station. All stationing should be carried to the nearest hundredth foot (1+50.14 identifies a location 150.14 feet from the beginning point of a route).

751.5.1.2.5 Elevations

Elevations shall be designated on the plans in feet, to the nearest hundredth, except as noted below.

Report to the nearest tenth of a foot for water surface elevations.

Report to the nearest foot for minimum tip penetration, pile cleanout penetration, minimum galvanized penetration and estimated maximum scour depth. (Any additional accuracy is acceptable, but not warranted.)

The foot unit is not required (Elevation 1234.98). Elevations shall be shown as close to their actual location as possible. Break lines may be used where necessary due to space limitations.

751.5.1.2.6 Batter

Batter is used to express the slight slope built into structural elements, such as piles, that are typically built vertical. Batter is reported by the horizontal component in inches per 12 inches vertically (Batter 2” per 12”).

751.5.1.2.7 Slopes

Slopes are expressed in non-dimensional ratios. The horizontal component shall always be shown first followed by the vertical component, separated by a colon. The horizontal component is unitary for slopes greater than 45 degrees and the vertical component is unitary for slopes less than 45 degrees. The components in a slope ratio must be of identical units. Slopes shall be specified “(Normal)” if perpendicular to a skewed member.

751.5.1.2 slopes.jpg

751.5.1.2.8 Temperatures

Temperatures are expressed using the Fahrenheit scale. Specific values of temperatures and ranges of temperatures shall be followed by the degree symbol and the Fahrenheit abbreviation. Temperature tolerances need only show the degree symbol (the temperature shall not be less than 40°F ±10°).

751.5.1.3 Grammar and Punctuation

Grammar and Punctuation Table of Contents
1. Abbreviations & Acronyms 2. Symbols 3. Capitalization 4. Plurality
5. Verb Tense 6. Punctuation 7. Nomenclature

751.5.1.3.1 Abbreviations & Acronyms

Care shall be taken to avoid the extravagant use of abbreviations.

Titles may use abbreviations only where required by lack of space.

Pay Items: The following units shall be used for pay items in quantity tables:

cu. foot each linear foot pound sq. yard
cu. yard gallon lump sum sq. foot ton

Leader Notes, Dimensions and Tabulated Data: Approved abbreviations may be used for dimensions, leader notes and tabulated data, except the abbreviated “typ.”, “min.” and “max.” shall always be used.

Notes: In general, abbreviations shall not be used in notes. Some exceptions include:

  • sections of the standard specifications (Sec)
  • acronyms (ASTM)
  • lengthy units (psi or ksi, lb/sf)
  • specific temperature (40°F)
  • specific size other than reinforcement (No. 4 sieve)
  • specific number (Intermediate Bent No. 2)
  • where space is very limited

Abbreviations of units of measure are written without periods, with the exception of inches since it could be confused with the preposition.

Units raised to a power should be reserved for tabulated data and leader notes.

The following list of abbreviations and acronyms shall be observed where applicable. Abbreviations should be capitalized if shown that way below; otherwise capitalization shall be in accordance with Capitalization. Unless otherwise shown below, abbreviations shall always use the singular form.

about abt.
abutment abut.
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AASHTO
angle ang.
approach appr.
approximately approx.
approved appv.
alternate or alternately alt.
area ar.
American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM
anchor bolt A.B.
April Apr.
asphalt asph.
August Aug.
avenue ave.
average avg.
baluster bal.
backfill bkfl.
beam bm.
bearing brg.
beginning beg.
bench mark B.M.
bent bt.
between btwn.
bevel bev.
bituminous bit.
bottom bott.
bracket brkt.
bridge br. (or BR, when referring to Bridge Division)
building bldg.
cantilever cant.
carbon fiber reinforced polymer CFRP
cast-in-place CIP
cast iron c.i.
center ctr.
centers (spacing, e.g. #4 @ 6” cts.) cts.
Central District CD
Central Office CO
channel (stream) chan.
clear or clearance cl.
closed-ended cast in place (piles) CECIP
collision (wall) coll.
column col.
concrete conc.
concrete minimum compressive strength f’c
concrete minimum compressive strength at initial loading f’ci
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CRSI
connection conn.
construction const.
continuous cont.
corrugated corr.
counterfort ctft.
countersunk ctsk.
county co.
creek cr.
creosoted creo.
cubic foot (unit of measure) cf or ft3
cubic inch (unit of measure) cu. in. or in3
cubic yard (unit of measure) cy or yd3
cubic foot per second (unit of measure) cfs
culvert culv.
dead load (loading) DL
December Dec.
deck girder d.g.
degree (angular unit of measure)(temperature range unit of measure) deg
department dept.
design des.
design flood (elevation) D.F.
detail det.
diagram diag.
diameter dia.
diameter (shown as dimension) D.
ditto (steel details) do.
division div.
double dbl.
drawing dwg.
File Extension for a CADD file in ORD .dgn
each ea.
east E
eastbound EB
eastbound lane EBL
elevation elev.
embedment, or embedded embed.
engineer engr.
equal or equally eq.
estimate or estimated est.
excavation exc.
existing exist.
expansion exp.
exterior ext.
fabricated fab.
Fahrenheit (temperature scale) F
far side (steel details) f.s.
February Feb.
federal fed.
fiber reinforced polymer FRP
fill face (culvert details) f.f.
fixed fix.
flange flg.
floor fl.
foot (unit of measure) ft
footing ftg.
gallon (unit of measure) gal
galvanize galv.
gauge ga.
girder gdr.
glass fiber reinforced polymer GFRP
grade gr.
head hd.
hexagonal hex.
high strength (for bolts) H.S.
high water (elevation) H.W.
highway hwy.
horizontal horiz.
hour (time unit of measure) hr
impact (loading) IM
inch (unit of measure) in.
include incl.
inner diameter (shown as a dimension) I.D.
interior or intermediate int.
January Jan.
joint jt.
July Jul.
June Jun.
Kansas City District KC
kilopound (unit of measure) kip
kilopound per cubic feet (unit of measure) kcf
kilopound per square feet (unit of measure) ksf
kilopound per square inch (unit of measure) ksi
lateral (steel details) lat.
left lt.
length lgth.
linear or lineal (feet, inches) lin.
linear foot (unit of measure) lf
live load (loading) LL
Load Factor Design LFD
Load & Resistance Factor Design LRFD
longitudinal long.
low water (elevation) L.W.
March Mar.
maximum max.
mechanical bar splice MBS
median med.
memorandum memo.
Microcomposite Multistructural Formable Steel
(high tensile strength rebar)
MMFX
mile (unit of measure) mi
miles per hour (unit of measure) mph
minimum min.
minute (angular unit of measure) (time unit of measure) min
miscellaneous misc.
Missouri Highway & Transportation Commission MHTC
Missouri Highway & Transportation Department MHTD (No longer used. Now MoDOT)
near side (steel details) n.s.
nominal nom.
north N
northbound NB
northbound lane NBL
northeast (or Northeast District) NE
northwest (or Northwest District) NW
not applicable or not available (table data) N/A
November Nov.
number no.
number (specific number, e.g. Sheet No. 3) No.
octagonal oct.
October Oct.
open-ended cast in place (piles) OECIP
optional opt.
ordinary high water (elevation) O.H.W.
ordinate ord.
outer diameter (shown as a dimension) O.D.
overflow o.f.
overhead o.h.
pair (reinforcement call out, 6 Pr. #7-U21) pr.
paragraph par.
perpendicular perp.
piece (for partial structural shapes) pc.
plate pl.
point pt.
polyvinyl chloride (for conduit and pipes) PVC
portable document format (file extension) .pdf
pound (unit of measure)(do not use #) lb
pound per cubic feet (unit of measure) pcf
pound per square inch (unit of measure) psi
prestressed P/S
profile pr.
project proj.
radius rad.
radius (shown as a dimension) R.
railroad R.R.
railway rlwy.
rehabilitate or rehabilitated rehab.
reinforcing or reinforcement reinf.
retaining (wall) ret.
right rt.
river r.
roadway rdwy.
route rte.
rubber compound rub. comp.
second (unit of measure) s
section sec.
section of MO standard and supplemental specifications Sec
September Sep.
shear connector S.C.
sheet sh.
shoulder shldr.
south S
southbound SB
southbound lane SBL
southeast (or Southeast District) SE
southwest (or Southwest District) SW
space(s), spacing or spaced spa.
specification spec.
square sq.
square foot (unit of measure) sf or ft2
square inch (unit of measure) sq in. or in2
square mile (unit of measure) sq mi or mi2
square yard (unit of measure) sy or yd2
standard std.
station sta.
stay-in-place SIP
steel minimum yield strength fy
St. Louis District SL
stream face (culvert details) s.f.
street st.
stringer str.
structural struc.
structural liaison engineer (consultants’ contact person) SLE
structural project manager SPM
substructure substr.
superelevation s.e.
superstructure superstr.
symmetrical symm.
tangent tan.
through thru
thread thd.
transportation project manager (at district) TPM
transverse trans.
truss tr.
typical typ.
use in place U.I.P.
variable var.
vertical vert.
vertical curve (length in curve data) V.C.
vertical point of intersection (curve data) VPI
weight wt.
welded wire reinforcement WWR
west W
westbound WB
westbound lane WBL
widen or widening wid.
with w/
without w/o
wrought iron w.i.
yard (unit of measure) yd
year (unit of measure) yr

751.5.1.3.2 Symbols

In general, symbols shall not be used in notes. Some exceptions include:

  • the # symbol when calling out bar sizes (#4)
  • measurements with both feet and inches (2’-0¾”)
  • where space is very limited


Symbols shall be used in dimensions, leader notes and tabulated data for noting reinforcing bars, structural steel shapes, bolts, welding, lengths, angles, etc. Unit symbols shall not be omitted where they apply, except in authorized designation of structural steel shapes, e.g. HP10x42.

The following list of approved symbols shall be observed where applicable and are shown with the required spacing. Welding symbols are not shown below but shall be in accordance with American Welding Society (AWS) and with EPG 751.5.9.3.1 Welding.

Word Symbol No Space Before/After
(Example)
Special Character
Code
and & NA NA
angle (generic) NA (5/8" ∠) \8736
angle (structural designation) L after (L5x3½x¾) NA
asterisk * NA \8727
at (spacing) @ NA NA
baseline 751.5.1.3.2 baseline.jpg NA \0163
centerline 751.5.1.3.2 centerline.jpg NA \0161
degree (angular unit of measure) ° before (20°) \0176
degree (temperature) ° before & after (5°F) \0176
diameter Ø before (¾"Ø) \11585
equal = NA NA
inch " before (3") NA
foot ' before (5ʹ) NA
minus (subtraction) - NA NA
minus (negative)(tolerance) - after (-15°) NA
minute (angular unit of measure) ʹ before (15ʹ) NA
number (size classification) # after (#4 bar) NA
plate 751.5.1.3.2 plate.jpg NA \0162
plus (addition) + NA NA
plus (tolerance) + after (+10%) NA
plus or minus (approximation) ± before (2"±) \0177
plus or minus (tolerance) ± after (±15°) \0177
per (unit combinations) / before & after (lb/ft) NA
percent % before (15%) NA
second (angular unit of measure) " before (30") NA

751.5.1.3.3 Capitalization

The following capitalization rules shall be used except notes for design specifications, loadings and unit stresses shall match as shown in EPG 751.50, A1. Design Specifications, Loadings & Unit Stresses and Standard Plans.

751.5.1.3.3 capitalization 2017.jpg

Titles and subtitles of details and sheet titles shall be in all capitals, including bracketed information, except for units of measure, e.g. PART SECTION (TYPICAL).

Titles, subtitles and headings of notes and tables and items in tables (except for quantity tables) shall have all nouns, pronouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs and prepositions capitalized except for units of measure. The capitalization of the pay items in quantity tables shall be in accordance with EPG 751.6 General Quantities.

Units of measurement shall always be lowercase except for Fahrenheit (F).

751.5.1.3.4 Plurality

The following words are typically used as noncount nouns in singular form. When these words describe a quantity of items then the item shall be made plural, e.g., two material samples shall be taken or three pipe units shall be tested.

Noncount Nouns
guardrail
material (Exception: Materials Division)
pile
pipe

For consistency, when referring to a group of items, the name is pluralized and not the indicator. See the examples below.

Correct Incorrect
Sheets No. 1, 2 & 3 Sheet Nos. 1, 2 & 3
Walls No. 1, 2 & 3 Wall Nos. 1, 2 & 3
Bents No. 1, 2 & 3 Bent Nos. 1, 2 & 3

When dimensions and quantities of items are used as hyphenated adjectives (describing another object) the dimension unit or the item shall always be in singular form.

Examples
4-inch hole
Three-strand cable

751.5.1.3.5 Verb Tense

Past tense shall be used for required work on the plans as if already completed, e.g., STAGED CONSTRUCTION as a title, not STAGE CONSTRUCTION.

Past tense shall also be used with verbs used as adjectives, including words describing the orientation of structures or structural components, e.g. prestressed girders or squared end precast panels.

Present tense shall be used for all instructions, e.g., Remove timber header when concrete pavement is placed, see end bent sheets for details.

751.5.1.3.6 Punctuation

General

Notes shall be written using complete punctuated sentences. Sentence fragments of explanatory or qualifying remarks marked off by parentheses may be inserted into completed punctuated sentences.

Leader notes and dimensions shall consist of sentence fragments. Sentence fragments are never punctuated. Use parentheses to divide separate multiple fragments, e.g., #4 Bars under bearing (6” Maximum spacing of stirrups).

Quotation Marks

Quotation marks shall only be used in instructions to quote the exact words that are to be written by the contractor, e.g. the word “RECOATED” shall be painted on the structure. Quotation marks shall not be used for emphasis and around specific items such as titles of tabulated data, pay items or section letters.

Hyphens

Hyphens, without spaces before or after the hyphen, shall be used to link two or more words or elements that act as a single idea. The following rules shall be followed.

Compound Adjectives Before a Noun
Examples: cast-in-place slab, 72-hour-old concrete.
  • But not for: slab is cast in place, concrete is 72 hours old.
Examples: I-girder bridge, H-pile footing, R-bar shape
  • But not for: I girders shall be…, H pile are used…, R bar shall be…
Examples: 1/4-inch joint, one-fourth-inch joint
  • But not for: joint is 1/4 inch, joint is one-fourth inch.
Examples: 3/4-inch joint, three-fourth-inch joint
  • But not for: joint is 3/4 inch, joint is three-fourths inch.
Examples: 1 1/2-inch pipe, one-and-one-half-inch pipe.
  • But not for: pipe is 1 1/2 inches, pipe is one and one-half inches.
Examples: one-strand cable, three-strand cable, lot-by-lot basis, chain-link fence, hot-mix asphalt.
Compound Numbers 21-99
Example: Twenty-two feet
Verbs Using Compound Nouns
Examples: water-proof surfaces, hydro-demolition deck
Fractions (Spelled Out)
Examples: One and five-eighths, One-third of slab
Prefixes and Suffixes
Before Proper Nouns or Adjectives
Example: mid-July
  • But not: midpoint
Between Duplicated Vowels
Examples: re-established, pre-existing, semi-invalid
  • But not: subbase, prestressed
Avoiding Confusion
De- (e.g., de-icing)
  • But not: defrost
Co- (e.g., co-pilot)
Always With
Self- (e.g., self-propelled)
-free (e.g., tack-free)
-based (e.g., water-based)
Reinforcement Callouts
In Bar Marks Between the Bar Size and Bar Designation
Example: #4-H100 (dimensions, leader notes & notes)
Between Number Required and the Bar Mark
Examples: 6-#4-H100 (dimensions & leader notes)
Six #4-H100 bars (notes)
Between Pairs Required (Pr.) and the Bar Mark
Examples: Pr.-#4-H100 (dimensions & leader notes)
Pair of #4-H100 bars (notes)
Not Between Number Required and Pairs (Pr.)
Examples: 4 Pr.-#4-H100 (dimensions & leader notes)
Four pairs of #4-H100 bars (notes)

751.5.1.3.7 Nomenclature

In addition to that found in Sec 100, the following engineering terminology, when required, shall be used on bridge plans. This list is not meant to be all inclusive, but primarily contains terminology unique to MoDOT.

Terminology Application
beam In general any horizontal supporting member however the term is specifically applied to the following superstructure members: steel wide flange members, and precast concrete box, precast voided slab and precast solid slab members.
blockout A one word noun used for voids formed into structural elements for a particular application (expansion device blockout, flange blockout) or used for a structural element placed in the void formed into another element (curb blockout).
block out A verb used for the process of forming a void into a structural element (The contractor shall block out the end of the top flange to accommodate the placement of diaphragm reinforcement.)
complete in place This phrase is used to cover all work and material required to complete a particular task or construct a particular item. Hyphens are not used and the phrase is usually set apart from the rest of the sentence with commas (Concrete masonry, complete in place, will be paid for…).
deck The portion of the superstructure that supports the live load
girder Large longitudinal superstructure members specifically applied to the following: steel plate girders, precast concrete I, precast bulb-tee, precast double-tee and precast NU members, and any cast-in-place concrete member.
guardrail Roadway traffic barrier consisting of heavy-gauge rolled steel beams mounted on strong posts. It is used to protect traffic from roadside obstacles or to prohibit traffic movements.
option A noun used for one of the choices which can be made.
optional An adjective used for not compulsory; left to personal choice; elective.
saw cut A noun or adjective used for joints cut into structural elements for a particular application (Silicone shall be placed in the saw cut) (The saw cut joint shall…).
A verb used for the process of cutting a joint into a structural element (The contractor shall saw cut the barrier to the depth shown on plans.)
slab Flat structural member usually formed of a single piece and can transfer loads horizontally to supporting members (slab on beam) or vertically to a supporting base material (slab on grade).

751.5.1.3.8 Numbers

In notes, the numbers zero and one shall always be spelled out (one inch, zero degrees) while all numbers shall be spelled out if at the start of a sentence (Two feet is the minimum distance…).

In notes, the numerals 2 through 10 shall be used for specific numbered items or if followed by a unit of measure otherwise spell out the number (Bent No. 4, 2 feet, 9 miles, six bolts, eight bars). In dimensions, tabulated data and leader notes; the numerals 2 through 10 shall be used even with quantity of items (6 bolts, 8 bars).

Numerals shall be used for all numbers in excess of ten (11 feet, 14 books, 26 miles, 12 sections) except for numerals beginning a sentence of a note (Twelve posts shall…).

Commas shall be used for numbers 10,000 and greater, for example 14,000 versus 9642.

Periods shall be used for the decimal marker of decimal numbers and preceded by zero for numbers less than one (0.254).

Fractions used in dimensions, tabulated data and single-lined leader notes shall be written with undersized text using a vinculum separating the numerator from the denominator and immediately follow whole numbers ("), except for rare cases where lack of vertical space makes this impractical (also known as “stacked” fractions).

Fractions used in notes and multiple-lined leader notes shall be written with regular text using a forward slash separating the numerator from the denominator and separated from whole numbers by a space (1 1/2).

Where multiple numbers are needed in a note, use commas or reword to avoid confusion (Instead of “Use 36 0.6”Ø Grade 270 strands with…”, say “Use 36 strands, 0.6”Ø Grade 270, with…”); or spell out one or more of the numbers (Two 1 1/2-inch diameter bolts).

751.5.1.4 Contract Plan File Name Convention

The file naming convention for all Bridge contract plans shall be: B_[bridge#]_[sheet#]_[job#]_[optional description].dgn. (Example: B_A8690_004_J3S2219_BENT1.dgn)

B for Bridge.
[bridge number] (e.g. A8690).
[sheet#] is the number of a particular sheet unique to a bridge number (e.g. 004).
[job#] is the job number assigned to the project (e.g. J3S2219).
[optional description] is an abbreviated description of the sheet information (e.g. BENT1, DRAINvert, BCelev, SLABplan ).

NO spaces or special characters shall be used in the filename. Acceptable characters are letters, numbers, underscores or dashes.

751.5.1.5 Order of Plan Sheets

The following table provides the preferred order of plan sheets for most new girder and beam bridges or the widening of girder and beam bridges.

Type of Sheet General Name of Sheet Comments
Location and Layout Plan and General Elevation (Front Sheet) 1 Required with curved bridges.
Estimated Quantities and General Notes
Staged Construction
Substructure Layout 1
Substructure CIP Piles
First End Bent
Vertical Drain at End Bents
Intermediate Bents
Last End Bent
Bearings and Girder/Beam Chairs
Superstructure:
Concrete
Girders and Beams
Girder Layout1 & 2 2Steel intermediate diaphragm details may be added to this sheet if space allows.
3 For NU Girders, WWR sheet comes before the Bars sheet.
4 Required with an expansion device at the end bent.
Prestressed Girders or Beams3
Steel Intermediate Diaphragms
End Diaphragm at First End Bent 4
Diaphragms at Intermediate Bents
End Diaphragm at Last Bent 4
Superstructure:
Steel Girders and Beams 5
Plan of Structural Steel 5 For simpler bridges, the sheets shown may be details that are combined on sheets titled “Steel Plate Girders” or “Steel Wide Flange Beams”
Elevation of Girder/Beam
Girder/Beam Curve Offsets 1
Camber and Dead Load Deflection
Splices
Diaphragms, Crossframes and Stiffeners
Superstructure:
Bridge Decks
Precast Prestressed Panels 6 Camber refers to the P/S camber diagram and is only required for concrete members.
Haunching refers to the diagram for concrete members and to the detail for steel members.
Slab Elevations refer to the theoretical bottom of slab elevation table.
Often the haunching and slab elevations for steel members are shown on the same sheet with camber and dead deflection diagrams for simpler bridges.
Slab Drains
Expansion Devices
Camber, Haunching and Slab Elevations6
Plan of Slab Showing Reinforcement
Section Thru Slab
Slab Pouring Sequence
Slab Curve Ordinates1
Superstructure:
Barrier or Railing
Elevation Sheet
Barrier or Railing Details at End Bents
Median Barrier Details
Miscellaneous Sheets Approach Slab
Bill of Reinforcing Steel
Sign Attachments
As-Built Pile and/or Drilled Shaft Data
Boring Data

For simpler bridges some of the above sheets may be combined, for example the section thru slab and slab pouring sequence are often on the same sheet. At the discretion of the Structural Project Manager identical end bents can both use the details of the first end bent with the number of the last end bent being added to the sheet title. Also at the discretion of the Structural Project Manager identical or similar intermediate bents can use the same details adding tables for variable dimensions.

For large or complex structures with a large amount of details an Index Sheet is often added as the front sheet. The Location Sketch, Land Survey Block, and the Structural Title Block typically located on the Plan and General Elevation Sheet is located with the Index of Drawings on the Index Sheet.

751.5.1.6 Example Bridge Plan Sheets

The following contains example bridge plan sheets with commentary:

Example Bridge Plans
Typical Prestressed Concrete Tangent Bridge
Alternate Sheets for Steel Bridges
Additional Sheets for Curved Bridges

751.5.1.7 Contract Addendums and Construction Changes

Contract Addendums:

  • All contract addendums are new documents/plan sheets
  • Central Office Design Division controls contract addendum releases and sequential ordering.

A bid revision (contract addendum) will be required if any of the contract documents require revisions after the project has been advertised but before the letting. The revisions shall be made in accordance with EPG 103.1.6.6.1.1.Revisions to Plans Sheets while maintaining the existing information. The file names of the revised plan sheets shall be in accordance with EPG 103.1.6.6.1.2 File Naming Convention for Plan Sheet Changes. It is important that revision numbers used in the file names of the revised sheets saved to the appropriate contract plans folder in ProjectWise correspond to the number of the contract addendum in coordination with Central Office Design Division Bidding and Contract Services. The new files shall be processed in accordance with EPG 237.9.4 File Naming Convention for Addendums.

Construction Changes:

  • Construction changes may be new plan sheets or revised plan sheets.
  • Bridge Division controls construction change releases and sequential ordering.
  • Sequential ordering for multiple structures in a project is relative to each structure.

A bridge change order (construction change) will be required if the final contract bridge plans require revisions after the project has been awarded. Similar to contract addendums, change order revisions shall be made while maintaining the existing information.

Revisions shall be identified with leader notes with a “C” prior to a sequential bridge change order number (not project) circumscribed by a triangle. For example, all revisions for the first bridge change order shall be identified with a “1” in the triangle, all revisions for the second bridge change order with a “2” in the triangle, etc. Following the triangle should be one of the following:

  • “Added” ← for identifying new details being added
  • “Deleted” ← for identifying existing details being deleted
  • New values replacing existing values

The overall revision to the sheet shall also be noted near the lower right side of the sheet using the same “C” and triangle format as used with the individual revisions made on the sheet. Following the triangle should be one of the following:

  • “Revised (Date)” ← for existing sheets with revisions being added
  • “Sheet Added (Date)” ← for new sheets being added
  • “Sheet Deleted (Date)” ← for existing sheets being deleted

The file name for all revised sheets for the first bridge change order shall contain a _C001 at the end of the final contract plan file name; the second bridge change order shall contain a _C002; etc. The signed and sealed revised plan sheets shall be saved to the appropriate contract plans folder in ProjectWise. The following example shows the progression of file names for plan sheets during bidding and construction.

Progression of File Names During Bidding and Construction

The signed and sealed change order plan sheets shall be printed to pdf, combined into a single file and saved in the appropriate eProjects location. The Structural Project Manager shall send a link to this file via email to the Resident Engineer and copied to others for processing. A change order template for Outlook is available in Development_Forms. 


Examples
Revising Existing Sheets
751.5.1.4 revising 2016.jpg
When minor change order revisions can be made clearly to existing sheets, items revised, added or deleted are enclosed using the Detail Circle line type. The overall revision to the sheet is noted near the lower right side of the sheet.
The date and description of the revision may also be added to the final plans title block (optional).
Deleting Existing Sheets
751.5.1.7 deleting 2024.png
When details on a sheet are no longer applicable, or change order revisions are too complicated to be made clearly, the entire sheet is crossed out with a bold line (match border). The deletion is noted near the lower right side of the sheet
The date and description of the revision may also be added to the final plans title block (optional).
Adding New Sheets
751.5.1.4 adding 2016.jpg
When a new sheet is needed to replace a deleted sheet or to add additional change order details, the addition is noted near the lower right side of the sheet.
The date and description of the revision may also be added to the final plans title block (optional).

751.5.2 Location and Layout Sheets

751.5.2.1 Plan and General Elevation (Front Sheet)

Typically, the first sheet of bridge plans for new structures and the widening or extension of existing structures shows a Plan Detail, a General Elevation Detail and several information blocks. For the rehabilitation of existing bridges a Typical Section Thru Deck Detail is shown instead of the Plan and General Elevation. There are also several supplementary details, dependent on the type of structure that may be required. This subarticle provides detailing guidelines for these items.

Front Sheet Table of Contents
1. Plan Detail 2. General Elevation Detail 3. Information Blocks 4. Typical Section Thru Existing Deck Detail 5. Supplementary Details
1.1 Substructure Elements 2.1 General Elevation View 3.1 Structure Description 5.1 Location Sketch
1.2 Skew Detail 2.2 Elevations 3.2 Land Survey 5.2 Foundation Data
1.3 Boring Locations 2.3 End of Slab 3.3 Final Plans Title 5.3 Hydraulic Data
1.4 Bridge Roadway Width 2.4 Bent Number & Fixity 3.4 Standard Plans
1.5 Features Crossed 2.5 Vertical Alignment Data 3.5 Bench Mark
1.6 North Arrow & Curve Data 2.6 Ground Lines 3.6 Structural Title
1.7 Miscellaneous Notes 2.7 Features Crossed
1.8 Miscellaneous Details 2.8 Slope Protection
2.9 Miscellaneous Notes
2.10 Miscellaneous Details

751.5.2.1.1 Plan Detail

The following items shall be included in or near the Plan Detail.

751.5.2.1.1.1 Substructure Elements

For new bridges or the widening of existing bridges the following substructure elements shall be drawn to scale and shown in the Plan Detail.

Beam Caps1 Detached Wings Rock Sockets
Collision Walls Drilled Shafts Seal Courses
Columns Footings Tie Beams
Deadman Anchors Piles2 Webs
1 Incidental details, such as steps, keyways, and anchor bolts (at the top of beams) shall not be shown.
2 Sway bracing shall not be shown at intermediate pile cap bents. Battered piles need only be shown for a short distance past the edge of the bent ending with a long break line.

The substructure shall be labeled and dimensioned as shown below. The first drawing specifies roadway elevations as profile grade elevations, since the profile grade is located at the centerline of roadway. On the second drawing, these elevations are specified as grade elevations. The second figure also shows the additional dimension required at the intermediate bents when the centerline of the roadway does not pass through the geometric center of the intermediate bents. This occurs with all unsymmetrical roadways and occasionally symmetrical roadways with horizontally curved continuous prestressed bridges. These drawings are applicable to both tangent and horizontally curved bridges.

751.5.2.1 plan 07-23.png
751.5.2.1 plan notes.jpg

For dual roadways/divided highways, the centerline of median shall be shown and specified and the perpendicular or radial offset from centerline of roadway shall be dimensioned.

For tangent, squared structures, the transverse centerline of the bents line up with the centerline of the structure, and therefore the centerline of bent can be added to the centerline of structure’s leader note.

When the profile grade is not along the centerline of roadway, but is along either the centerline of structure or median, the profile grade shall be added to the appropriate leader note. When the profile grade is not along the centerline of roadway, structure or median, the location of profile grade shall be shown in the roadway width detail in accordance with Roadway Width.

The span lengths for steel and prestressed bridges given in the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout are horizontal dimensions. For prestressed girder or beam sheets, the actual girder or beam length shall be adjusted accordingly for grade.

The following additional dimensions shall also be shown in the plan detail:

Length and width of footings and seal courses
Perpendicular distance from centerline of piles to the front face and to the fill face of end bents
751.5.2.1.1.2 Skew Detail

The following skew detail shall be drawn off the centerline of roadway (right angle square can also be used instead of 90° angle dimension):

751.5.2.1 tangent.jpg

For curved bridges where the referenced radial line occurs at a congested location, and it is not possible to show the skew detail clearly, state the skew requirements by providing the following note:

For Skewed Bents:
All bents are parallel to a line skewed __ right left advanced from a radial line at station __.
For Squared Bents:
All bents are parallel to a radial line at station __.
751.5.2.1.1.3 Boring Locations

All available boring data locations shall be shown with the boring symbol (Boring Symbol cell, under CADD Standards: Front Sheets)

Each boring location shall be labeled with its identifying number.

751.5.2.1.1.3 10-26-93.png

Add Notice and Disclaimer Regarding Boring Log Data near the Plan detail. This note is available as a cell in CADD Standards: Detailing Notes (E3.2 Notice and Disclaimer).

If inadequate space is available for placement of the disclaimer note, place the portion that says “Indicates location of borings.” (including the symbol), and place the rest of the note on the General Notes and Estimated Quantities Sheet. Add a note nearby stating, “For Notice and Disclaimer Regarding Boring Log Data, see Sheet No. _.”

751.5.2.1.1.4 Bridge Roadway Width

A small portion of the outside edges of the bridge roadway shall be shown at the proper location within one of the spans if space allows, but may be placed adjacent to bridge if required for clarity. The dimension of the overall roadway width shall be provided, followed by “Roadway”. The dimensions from the centerline of roadway to each edge of the roadway shall be provided also. If the profile grade is not along the centerline of roadway, structure or median, a small portion of the profile grade shall also be shown, and the offset dimension from the centerline of roadway provided. The dimensions need not be specified as radial for curved structures.

See the Bridge Memorandum for location of the profile grade. Generally, the profile grade will be shown in the cross section through the superstructure on the slab sheet and in the plan view on the front sheet of the design plans. Generally, the profile grade is at the centerline of roadway for two-way traffic bridges. For one-way traffic bridges used in standard divided highways, the profile grade is at some other location away from the centerline of roadway. When the profile grade is not located along the centerline of the roadway, the centerline of roadway elevations shall be specified as grade elevations.

751.5.2.1.1.5 Features Crossed

Centerlines of Features Crossed

The centerline of existing, new and future roadways, railroads and trails (if known) shall be shown at their proper location, extended slightly past the boundary of the bridge. The intersection of a centerline with the bridge’s centerline shall be specified as follows.

751.5.2.1 alignments crossed.jpg

The centerline of dual lane roadways shall also be shown and specified with the appropriate lane designation.

Boundary and Clearances of Features Crossed

Using boundary lines (style 2, weight 1) the edge of travel lanes, shoulders and barrier of roadways and the edges of trails shall be shown at their proper location, extended slightly past the boundary of the bridge. The travel lanes and shoulders shall be dimensioned and labeled as shown in the following detail. The barrier shall be labeled as well.

The minimum horizontal clearance to the closest substructure element, wall element, rigid barrier, or to the toe of slope steeper than 3 to 1 (1V:3H) on each side of each roadway and railroad underneath a bridge shall be dimensioned at their proper location and labeled as shown in the following detail. Barrier or railing, beam caps, wall coping, and collision walls will control over columns and retaining walls. The horizontal clearance shall be measured from the edge of traveled way for roadways (clearance includes shoulders and auxiliary lanes) and from the centerline of tracks for railroads.

Using detail circles (style 2, weight 1) the point of minimum vertical clearance for each existing, new and future roadway and railroad shall be shown at their proper location obtained from the design. Each point of minimum vertical clearance shall be dimensioned from the intersecting centerlines (unless on centerline) and also labeled as shown in the following detail.

751.5.2.1.1.5 min vert clearance.jpg
751.5.2.1.1.6 North Arrow and Curve Data

When the Location Sketch is eliminated, or placed on the General Notes and Estimated Quantities Sheet, the north arrow and all horizontal curve data of roadways going over, under, or within 150 feet of the structure shall be provided near the Plan Detail.

751.5.2.1.1.7 Miscellaneous Notes for the Plan Detail

Applicable notes of EPG 751.50 E3. Miscellaneous notes shall be placed near the Plan Detail.

751.5.2.1.1.8 Miscellaneous Details for the Plan Detail
  • Bridge spans, identified in accordance with Span Ranges.
  • Outline of existing substructure components when they are in close proximity to new substructure.
  • Temporary shoring required for construction and specified as a roadway item, if applicable.
  • For staged bridge construction with MSE walls at the abutments, consider specifying temporary MSE walls on the plan details. Sometimes due to limited space or to retain improved foundation material or to retain existing slope contractor may need to provide temporary shoring prior to constructing temporary MSE wall systems in staged construction, but only the temporary MSE wall should be indicated on the plans.
  • MSE walls built in conjunction with bridge shall be shown with the wall number specified. Walls need only be shown for a short distance past the boundary of the bridge ending with a long break line.
  • Alignment of new or existing underground utilities that may cause construction difficulties due to the close proximity to new substructure.

751.5.2.1.2 General Elevation Detail

The following elements need to be included in or near the General Elevation Detail.

751.5.2.1.2.1 General Elevation View

The general elevation view of a structure is to show the structure in its entirety meaning that, for a bridge, this would include the superstructure, substructure and foundations. Because of limited space on a plan sheet and scalability conflicts, for example in the case of a bridge where a bridge is much longer than tall, controlling the amount of distortion becomes critical. Because of this, the information shown should be depicted as proportionally correct as is possible but in all cases the relational distinctions made should be rational such as correctly showing both the elevation and drawing of the bottom of a drilled shaft as it relates to other details.

The elevation of the structure shall be drawn as a section through centerline of the structure but showing the side elevation of the end bent wing walls and barrier or railing. Only one column will be shown (no isometric views of the structure). The bents in the general elevation detail shall line up with the span length extension lines in the plan detail. The vertical placement of structural elements shall be shown as close to their actual location as possible. Long piles need only be shown for a short distance below footings ending with a long break line.

These hidden items shall be shown: end of slab, fill face, approach notch, wing brace, collision walls, tie beams, web beams, pile webs and piles embedded in concrete or inside spacers. For clarity, girders embedded in diaphragms should not be shown.

751.5.2.1.2.2 Elevations

The elevations of the bottom of the following items shall be specified: rock sockets, web beams, sway bracing, spread footings and pile footings. Add “(Not above)” if indicated in the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout. The elevation of the bottom of footing need not be specified when a seal course is present.

The elevations of the top of the following items shall be specified: seal course, anticipated sound rock, drilled shafts, permanent casing, tie beams, collision walls and rails of railroads at location of minimum vertical clearance. Add “(Survey Date ___)” to the rail elevation, using the date reported in the bridge survey report.

For water crossings, the design flood elevation and low water elevation (ordinary water elevation if low water not available) shall be specified by pointing to the top of a water line symbol placed at the proper vertical location, preferably within the main span of the bridge. A single line may be used to represent the low water elevation if there is not enough room to clearly show a water line symbol. The low water elevation shall not be shown or specified if the stream runs dry.

The excavation datum elevation, if required shall be specified by pointing to a single line placed at the proper vertical location, preferably below the ground line, near an intermediate bent. The excavation datum shall not be specified when no excavation exists below that elevation, such as in the case of all intermediate bents being pile cap bents or drilled shafts.

751.5.2.1.2.3 End of Slab

The end of slab at both ends shall be called out with the following leader note:

751.5.2.1 end of slab.jpg
751.5.2.1.4.jpg
751.5.2.1.2.4 Bent Number and Fixity

The bent number and bent fixity shall be specified for all bents as shown to the right. The text for both shall be the regular small text used for all notes. “Fix.” shall be used for all integral bents and non-integral bents with fixed bearings. “Exp.” shall be used for all bents with expansion bearings. “F.” and “E.” may be used if required due to lack of space.

751.5.2.1.2.5 Vertical Alignment Data

The vertical alignment of bridges shall be placed directly above the bridge in the General Elevation Detail, with vertical curve data placed as near as possible to the vertical point of intersection.

751.5.2.1 vertical.jpg

A crest vertical curve detail is shown. If the bridge is located on a sag vertical curve, the detail for a sag vertical curve is to be used.

751.5.2.1.2.6 Ground Lines

Existing, new and future ground lines at the centerline of the roadway of a bridge shall be shown slightly beyond the ends of the bridge. Existing and new ground lines shall be detailed using a solid line (style 0, weight 5) with the appropriate fill pattern except in locations of new slope protection. Future ground lines (such as a future railway track or roadway) shall be detailed using a dashed line (style 2, weight 2).

Existing ground lines shall be specified as “Ground Line (Survey Date ___)”, using the date reported in the bridge survey report.

New roadways underneath bridges shall be specified as “Roadway and Drainage Excavation Line” at one of the sides slopes or ditches. Future ground lines shall be specified as “Future Ground Line”.

751.5.2.1.2.7 Features Crossed

Outlines of Features Crossed

Pavement and permanent barriers of existing, new and future roadways shall be shown at their proper location using the appropriate CAD levels.

The rails of existing, new and future railroads shall be shown at their proper location using the appropriate CAD levels.

Minimum Clearances to Features Crossed

For existing and new roadways and trails, the minimum vertical clearance obtained from the design shall be dimensioned from the location obtained from the design and labeled as shown in the following detail.

For existing and new railroads, the minimum vertical clearance shall be dimensioned from the location obtained from the design. The dimension callout shall be the asterisked final railroad clearance note of EPG 751.50 E3 Miscellaneous placed near the General Elevation as shown in the following detail. The value to use in the clearance note shall be obtained from the Design Layout (may be greater than minimum shown below).

It is not required to show the minimum vertical clearance of future roadways, railroad and trails.

751.5.2.1.2.7 min clearance.jpg

Clearances for Traffic during Construction

For existing and new roadways and trails in operation during construction the note in EPG 751.50 A3 All Structures specifying vertical clearance during construction shall be included in the General Notes.

For existing and new railroads in operation during construction, the following railroad minimum construction clearance detail shall be provided near the General Elevation Detail.

751.5.2.1.2.7 construction.jpg
751.5.2.1.2.8 Slope Protection

When rock blanket is specified on the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout, it is to be shown in the General Elevation Detail, typically in combination with the slope criteria. The following figure shows common rock blanket details. See EPG 751.1.2.15 Bridges over Railroad for criteria specific to bridges over railroads.

751.5.2.1 genrral.jpg

Note:

When permanent erosion control geotextile is specified on the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout, it shall be specified with the rock blanket. Permanent erosion control geotextile material shall be used under slab drains in combination with rock blanket.
The 100-year flood elevation and flow depth (D) are shown for illustration and are not to be shown on the plans.
(a) Rock blanket on the spill fill slopes shall be shown to the elevation specified on the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout in accordance with EPG 751.1.2.29 Protection of Spill Slopes and Side Slopes. If the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout specifies extending the rock blanket above this elevation to provide slope protection beneath slab drains (as shown on the right side of above drawing), the top of the rock blanket on the side slope may be shown with elevation specified. Otherwise the elevation and detail need not be shown.
(b) A rock blanket apron should extend from the toe of the spill slope into the bridge waterway a distance equal to twice the 100-year flood flow depth D in the overbank area near the embankment, but need not exceed 25 feet.
(c) See the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout for specified slope of spill fill. Maximum allowable spill fill slope is determined by Construction and Materials Division as specified in the soils survey for each project.
751.5.2.1.2.9 Miscellaneous Notes for the General Elevation Detail

Applicable notes of EPG 751.50 E1. Excavation and Fill and E3. Miscellaneous, shall be placed near the General Elevation Detail.

751.5.2.1.2.10 Miscellaneous Details for the General Elevation Detail
  • If fencing is located on the structure, only a small portion of the fencing need be shown at each end of the structure and labeled at one of the locations as “Pedestrian Fence” for chain link fences and “Decorative Fence” for all other types of fences.
  • Outline of remaining portions of existing substructure components that are in close proximity to new substructure.
751.5.2.1 earth plug.jpg
  • Temporary shoring required for construction and specified as a roadway item, if applicable.



  • When earth plugs are required due to Class C roadway fill, the earth plug and bottom width and slope of plug shall be specified as shown. The Class C roadway fill need not be shown or specified.



751.5.2.1 MSE.jpg


  • MSE walls shall be shown, including coping, leveling pad, pile spacers and, if required, gutter and over excavation of unsuitable foundation material. The wall number, spacers, depth of spacers below leveling pad and over excavation shall be specified as shown.



  • Outline of new or existing underground utilities that may cause construction difficulties due to the close proximity to new substructure.
  • Signs or lighting attached to the structure shall be shown and labeled if space allows, but may be omitted if required for clarity.
  • The location of overhead power lines that may cause construction difficulties shall be shown using an oval or circle Bridge-Miscellaneous object line labeled “Overhead Power Lines”.

751.5.2.1.3 Information Blocks

EPG 751.5.2.1.3 Information Blocks provides instructions for filling out required information blocks. The following picture shows each of the required information blocks, and the sections that follow provide instruction for filling out each block.

751.5.2.1.3.jpg
751.5.2.1.3.1 Structure Description

A description of each of the superstructure types shall be provided at the top of the front sheet.

For bridges, this description consists of the span configuration and the type of superstructure followed by “SPAN” or “SPANS” as required.

The following elements are used to define the span configuration:

Parentheses indicate a break in continuity
Dashes and commas indicate level of continuity, see examples
Span lengths that are partial foot lengths shall be reported to the nearest tenth foot.
Examples of Bridge Span Configurations
Configuration Explanation
(98’) Single span
(35’)(40’)(35’) Multiple simple spans with deck joints at each intermediate bent
5@(40’) Multiple simple spans of the same length with deck joints at each intermediate bent
(35’)5@(40’)(35’) Multiple simple spans including a series of same length spans and with deck joints at each intermediate bent
(35’,40’,35’) Multiple simple spans with a continuous deck
(5@45’) Multiple simple spans of the same length with a continuous deck (type of superstructure would need to start with “SIMPLE”)
(35’,5@40’,35’) Multiple simple spans with a continuous deck including a series of same length spans
(65’-85’-65.4’) Unit of continuous spans
(5@45’) Unit of continuous spans of the same length
(65’-3@85’-65’) Unit of continuous spans including a series of same length spans
(100’-120’-110’)(120’-180’-120’) Two units of continuous spans separated by a deck joint
2@(120’-180’-120’) Two identical units continuous spans separated by a deck joint
(65’)(120’-180’)(65’) Simple spans in combination with a unit of continuous spans separated by a deck joint
Short hand notation if used defaults to the continuous configuration if it cannot be interpreted otherwise. For example (5@45’) means continuous spans however (40’,5@45’,45) means a continuous deck over simple spans. Short hand notation should not be used with decks that are continuous over both simple and continuous spans.
Common Types of Bridge Superstructures
Precast Concrete Steel1 Cast-In-Place Concrete
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
I-GIRDER
COMPOSITE WIDE FLANGE BEAM CONTINUOUS CONCRETE SOLID SLAB3
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
BULB-TEE GIRDER
COMPOSITE PLATE GIRDER CONTINUOUS CONCRETE VOIDED SLAB3
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
NU-GIRDER
WIDE FLANGE BEAM2 CONTINUOUS CONCRETE BOX GIRDER3
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
SPREAD BOX BEAM
PLATE GIRDER2 CONCRETE DECK GIRDER
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
ADJACENT BOX BEAM
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
SPREAD VOIDED SLAB BEAM
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
ADJACENT VOIDED SLAB BEAM
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
SOLID SLAB BEAM
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
DOUBLE-TEE GIRDER
1 “CONTINUOUS” or “SIMPLE” shall be specified as required for multiple span structures.
2 Non-composite is not required to be specified for steel structures.
3 “CONTINUOUS” not required for single span structures.

For culverts, the structure description consists of the cell configuration and the type of culvert. The description ends with CULVERT and is followed with ON ROCK for box culverts without a bottom slab.

Examples
3(8’x8’) CONCRETE BOX CULVERT
2(8’x9.5’) CONCRETE BOX CULVERT ON ROCK
5(6’) CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE CULVERT

For existing structures that are being modified and/or rehabilitated, the structure description shall start with “U.I.P.” followed by a list of all superstructure work followed by “EXISTING” followed by the span configuration and type of structure. Rehabilitate covers a range of work, including but not limited to slab repair, adding or replacing wearing surfaces, adding curb blockouts and replacing slab overhangs. When removing joints from an existing superstructure or relocating the joints to the intermediate bents, add “TO” after “EXISTING”.

Types of Typical Work and the
Order Listed if the Work is Applicable
Redeck, Widen, Seismic Retrofit, Strengthen, Make Composite,
Extend (culverts), Rehabilitate and Reconfigure
Various Examples
(span/cell configuration and type of structure not shown)
U.I.P. AND REHABILITATE EXISTING…
U.I.P., REDECK AND REHABILITATE EXISTING…
U.I.P., REDECK AND MAKE COMPOSITE EXISTING…
U.I.P., STRENGTHEN AND REHABILITATE EXISTING…
U.I.P., WIDEN AND REHABILITATE EXISTING…
U.I.P. AND EXTEND EXISTING…
U.I.P., EXTEND AND REHABILITATE EXISTING…
U.I.P., REDECK AND RECONFIGURE EXISTING TO…

Replacing the entire superstructure is an exception to the above rules. For superstructure replacements, a list of all substructure work shall specified followed by “EXISTING SUBSTRUCTUE AND REPLACE SUPERSTRUCTURE WITH” followed by the new span configuration and type of structure.

Examples (span configuration and type of structure not shown)
U.I.P. EXISTING SUBSTRUCTURE AND REPLACE SUPERSTRUCTURE WITH…
U.I.P. AND REHABILITATE EXISTING SUBSTRUCTURE AND REPLACE SUPERSTRUCTURE WITH…
U.I.P., WIDEN AND REHABILITATE EXISTING SUBSTRUCTURE AND REPLACE SUPERSTRUCTURE WITH…
751.5.2.1.3.2 Land Survey

The section or survey (SEC/SUR), township (TWP) and range (RGE) of the Public Land Survey System where the structure is located shall be indicated using small bold text in the land survey block in the upper right corner of the sheet.

751.5.2.1 Land survey.jpg
751.5.2.1 title.jpg
751.5.2.1.3.3 Final Plans Title

The final plans title block shall be provided on all sheets. The following job-specific information needs to be filled in: project route, sheet number, county, job number and bridge number. Date Prepared fills in automatically when the sheet is printed. Consultant-prepared plans shall also include the consultant’s logo, address and license number in the area provided directly below the Commission’s title.

751.5.2.1.3.4 Bench Mark

The elevation and location of a bench mark in the vicinity of the structure shall be provided just above the structure title block using small bold text. This information shall be typed exactly as shown on the plat sheet of the bridge survey (typically all uppercase but not always).

751.5.2.1 bench mark.jpg
751.5.2.1.3.5 Structure Title

Features spanned, structure location along the stationing route, and the reference station shall be included in the structure title block, located directly to the left of the standard plans block.

751.5.2.1 structure title.jpg
Note:
Do not use “MO” or “US” in front of state route numbers or letters.
Use specific names for rivers, streams, state routes, railroads, city streets and county roads. Specific names not required for private roads, pedestrian trails, state and county lines.
1 The stationing route is always the project route for bridges and culverts that carry or intersect the project route and for walls parallel the project route. For bridges, culverts and walls that do not directly involve the project route such as outer roads or secondary state routes, the stationing route is the state route carrying, intersecting or parallel to the structure.
The project route is the route the entire project is associated with and is always listed in the final plans title block on the right hand side of the sheet.
2 Should not be confused with a “tie station” on a Bridge Memo used to locate a specific bent with respect to route for purposes of design only. For example, stream piers are sometimes “tied” so a designer knows not to locate it differently. However, plans need not show this station.

Examples of Structure Title Block

751.5.2.1 examples.jpg

751.5.2.1.4 Section Thru Existing Deck Detail

For rehabilitation of existing bridges a Typical Section Thru Deck Detail is shown instead of the Plan and General Elevation Details. All deck repairs should be specified in this detail.

Detailing Guidance
EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)


Bridge Standard Drawings
Deck Rehabilitation
Deck Replacement

751.5.2.1.5 Supplementary Details

This subarticle provides guidance on several supplementary details that may be required, dependent on the type of structure. These details, if required, shall be placed on the front sheet if space allows. Otherwise, they shall be placed on the General Notes and Estimated Quantities Sheet.

751.5.2.1.5.1 Location Sketch

A Location Sketch shall be provided for all structures, including culverts and retaining walls. The Location Sketch may be eliminated on grade separation structures, except where payment is made for removal of an existing structure, or a congested area is involved such as a series of ramps, extended slope protection, etc. When a Location Sketch is provided for a grade separation, the tie station of both alignments shall be shown.

The Location Sketch for stream crossings shall show the outline of the stream channel at the bridge site. The name of the stream shall be given and the direction of flow indicated by an arrow labeled "Flow". Any required channel change shall be shown and labeled "Proposed Channel Change (See roadway plans)”.

The centerline of the roadway shall be shown and noted. The beginning station and outline of the new bridge shall be shown, and the new bridge labeled "Proposed Structure". The existing bridge, if any, shall be shown and labeled "Existing Structure". If it is a state bridge that is to be removed, the bridge number shall be indicated. Place the north arrow near the Location Sketch.

When the Location Sketch is placed on the front sheet, all horizontal curve data of roadways going over, under, or within 150 feet of the structure shall be provided nearby.

751.5.2.1.5.2 Foundation Data

See EPG 751.50 E2. Foundation Data Table for appropriate data to be included in the foundation data table and notes required below the table.

751.5.2.1.5.3 Hydraulic Data
751.5.2.1.5.3.1 Data Tables

The following tables for hydrologic data are required on all bridge and box culvert stream crossings. The hydrologic data shall be provided on the Bridge Memorandum or the Design Layout. The appropriate table shall be placed near the Location Sketch.

751.1.5.2.1 data tables.jpg


(1) See EPG 748.2 Roadway Design Critera
(2) See EPG 748.6 High Water Surface Elevation
(3) See EPG 748.4 Headwater and Backwater
(4) See EPG 748.3.5 Bridges and Culverts. Flooding source for freeboard should be recorded in the table when minimum freeboard is not from headwater flow.
(5) See EPG 750.3.2.4.5 Overtopping Discharge and Frequency
Provide discharge if frequency equals 500 years or less, otherwise record as “N/A”.
(6) See EPG 750.3.2.4.5 Overtopping Discharge and Frequency
Provide frequency if frequency equals 500 years or less, otherwise record as “> 500 years”.
(7) Insert “Overtopping” and provide the Overtopping Flood (EPG 749.2.3) elevation if frequency equals 500 years or less, otherwise insert “500-Year” and provide the 500-year flood elevation.
*' Omit rows in table if the Design Flood Frequency is for a 100-year flood event
751.5.2.1.5.3.2 Accuracy

Formulas upon which hydraulic calculations are based are approximations which have been developed from model studies, stream gaging and/or statistical analysis. The hydraulic design formulas therefore are considered to be approximations. Due to the diverse nature of individual drainage basins, considerable engineering judgment must be exercised in hydraulic design to obtain reasonable and practical results. Due to these factors, accuracy used in hydrologic calculations and reported in the hydrologic data tables is to the accuracy listed below.

Accuracy of Hydrologic Data
Hydrologic Data Data Limit Accuracy
Drainage Area Less than 10 mi2 0.1 mi2
Greater than 10 mi2 1.0 mi2
Estimated Discharge Less than 2000 cfs 10 cfs
Greater than 2000 cfs 100 cfs
Velocities All 0.1 ft/s
Water Surface Elevations All 0.1 ft

751.5.2.2 General Notes and Estimated Quantities

Typically, the second sheet of bridge plans for new structures and the widening or extension of existing structures shows the general notes and estimated quantities applicable to the entire structure. For culverts, retaining walls and rehabilitation of existing bridges there is typically enough room on the front sheet for these items. This section provides detailing guidance for these items.

751.5.2.2.1 General Notes

Applicable notes from EPG 751.50 A. General Notes, shall be placed on this sheet in the order given, based on structure type and information provided in the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout and design computations. The General Notes typically are shown on the same sheet as the Estimated Quantities.

751.5.2.2.2 Estimated Quantities

Applicable quantity tables and the corresponding notes from EPG 751.50 B. Estimated Quantities Notes shall be placed on this sheet. Typically, the Estimated Quantities Table for the entire structure is placed on the same sheet as the General Notes, with supplementary quantity tables placed below, where space allows. The quantity tables shall be filled out based on the structure’s estimated quantities computations, in accordance with EPG 751.6 General Quantities.

751.5.2.3 Staged Construction

When the structure is to be built in stages to allow traffic during construction, the details shall be placed on the Staged Construction Sheet, in accordance with requirements specified in the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout. In a set of bridge plans, this sheet, when required, shall follow the General Notes and Estimated Quantities Sheet.

751.5.2.4 Substructure Layout (Curved Bridges)

For horizontally curved bridges, a substructure layout more detailed than that provided on the Plan and General Elevation sheet shall be added after the Staged Construction sheet, if applicable; otherwise it shall be placed after the General Notes and Estimated Quantities sheet. The following sketches show the form and content to be used in detailing the substructure layout for some of the most common horizontal curve situations. When situations arise where modification of these sketches becomes necessary, the sketches should be used as a guide with regard to the form and content of the modified layout.

Substructure Layout Sheet Table of Contents
1. Bents Located Using Span Chords
2. Bents Located Using Long Chord (Tangent girders and curved deck with varying overhangs)
3. Built Tangent along Long Chord (Deck slightly wider with roadway striped on a curved)

751.5.2.4.1 Bents Located Using Span Chords

Attention should be given to the fact that in all cases illustrated here, the centerline of the roadway passes through the geometric center of the intermediate bents. On occasion, particularly in the case of continuous prestressed concrete bridges, or with unsymmetrical roadways, this will not happen. In these and any other case which may cause a similar situation, Dimension D, from the intersection of the centerline of the roadway and the longitudinal centerline of the bent, to the geometric center of the bent, must be shown. The orientation of the bents shall be as noted in the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout. Typically, all bents of concrete bridges will be parallel to a line at a particular station, while bents of steel structures will be aligned radially or have the same skew.

The following key describes the dimensions marked on the following four figures:

(1) Dimension along tangent (7) Angle between fill face and chord
(2) Offset from the tangent (8) Angle between fill face and radial line
(3) Angle between chords of adjacent spans (9) Angle between tangent and chord
(4) Chord length (10) Skew angle
(5) Dimension along centerline median or roadway (11) Dimension from centerline median to centerline lane along centerline

bent

(6) Angle between centerline bent and chord (12) Dimension from centerline median to centerline lane along fill face
751.5.2.4.1.1 Dual Lane Structures Tied at Fill Face of End Bent
751.5.2.4 dual.jpg
751.5.2.4.1.2 Single Lane Structure Tied at Fill Face of End Bent
751.5.2.4 single.jpg
751.5.2.4.1.3 Dual Lane Structure Tied at Intersection
751.5.2.4 dual intersection.jpg
751.5.2.4.1.4 Single Lane Structure Tied at Intersection
751.5.2.4 single intersection.jpg

751.5.2.4.2 Bents Located Using Long Chord (Tangent girders and curved deck with varying overhangs)

When noted on the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout, short bridges on small horizontal curve alignments may be detailed on a line parallel to the long chord. The intent is to simplify the bridge geometry by placing the centerline of steel or P/S assembly on or parallel to the long chord to the centerline of roadway curve between fill faces of end bents. In order to avoid excessive slab overhangs, the line parallel to the long chord is usually placed at one-half the mid ordinate between curve and long chord. For this situation, the outside faces of the slab, barrier or railing, and wings shall be detailed concentrically with the roadway curvature, and curve ordinates shall be furnished on the plans.

It is to be noted that even for symmetrical width bridges, the location of bearings will not be symmetrical about the centerline of bents. Also, the intermediate bent caps shall be built to sufficient length on each end to accommodate the bearing offsets toward each end.

751.5.2.4.2.1 Squared and Symmetrical Roadway and Spans
751.5.2.4 symmetrical.jpg
751.5.2.4.2.2 Squared and Unsymmetrical Roadway, Symmetrical Spans
751.5.2.4 unsymmetrical.jpg
751.5.2.4.2.3 Skewed and Symmetrical Roadway and Spans
751.5.2.4 skewed.jpg

751.5.2.4.3 Built Tangent along Long Chord (Deck slightly wider with roadway striped on a curve)

For wide roadways and very small degrees of curvature for which the mid ordinates are 3 inches or less, the Bridge Memorandum or Design Layout may occasionally direct that the entire bridge be detailed as a tangent bridge along the long chord. For this situation, no parts of the bridge are to be curved. Details for the plan view on the plan and general elevation sheet shall be in accordance with EPG 751.5.2.1.1.1 Plan View, except that the centerline of structure will be on the long chord. A supplementary bridge substructure layout sheet shall not be required for this type of layout.

751.5.3 Bridge Substructure Sheets

751.5.3.1 End Bents

Detailing Guidance
EPG 751.30 Open Concrete End Bents
EPG 751.33 Concrete Semi Deep Abutments
EPG 751.34 Concrete Pile Cap Non-Integral End Bents
EPG 751.35 Concrete Pile Cap Integral End Bents
EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)


Bridge Standard Drawings
Cast-In-Place Pile
Deadman Anchor Systems

751.5.3.2 Vertical Drain at End Bents

Bridge Standard Drawings
Vertical Drain at End Bents

751.5.3.3 Intermediate Bents

Detailing Guidance
EPG 751.31 Open Concrete Intermediate Bents
EPG 751.32 Concrete Pile Cap Intermediate Bents
EPG 751.37.1.6 Drilled Shaft General Detail Considerations
EPG 751.38.8.3.1 Spread Footing Reinforcement
EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)


Bridge Standard Drawings
Cast-In-Place Pile
As Built Drilled Shaft Data

751.5.3.4 Bearings

Detailing Guidance
EPG 751.11 Bearings
EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)


Bridge Standard Drawings
Bearings

751.5.4 Bridge Superstructure Sheets

751.5.4.1 Precast P/S Concrete Girders and Beams

Detailing Guidance
EPG 751.22 P/S Concrete I Girders
EPG 751.23 P/S Concrete Double Tee
EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)


Bridge Standard Drawings
Prestressed Concrete I-Girders
Prestressed Concrete Box Beams
Steel Intermediate Diaphragms

751.5.4.2 C.I.P. Girders and Slabs

Detailing Guidance
EPG 751.17 Concrete Slab Bridges
EPG 751.18 Concrete Multicell Box Girder Bridges
EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)

751.5.4.3 Steel Plate Girders and Wide Flanges Beams

Detailing Guidance
EPG 751.14 Steel Superstructure
EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)


Bridge Standard Drawings
Cross Frames and Diaphragms
Plate Girder Splices
Drip Bars for Weathering Steel
Strengthening with Deck Rehabilitation and Paint Overlap Detail
Strengthening with Deck Replacement

751.5.4.4 Expansion Devices

Detailing Guidance
EPG 751.13 Expansion Devices
EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)


Bridge Standard Drawings
Expansion Devices
Joint Seals

751.5.4.5 Bridge Decks

Detailing Guidance
EPG 751.10 General Superstructure
EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)


Bridge Standard Drawings
Slab Sections
Precast Prestressed Deck Panels
Slab Drains
Deck Rehabilitation
Deck Replacement

751.5.4.6 Barrier and Railing

Detailing Guidance
EPG 751.12 Barriers, Railings, Curbs and Fences
EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)


Bridge Standard Drawings
Concrete Barrier
Thrie Beam Railing
Two Tube Railing
Curb Blockout and Barrier End Modification
Guardrail Attachment to Box Culverts

751.5.5 Culvert Sheets

Detailing Guidance
EPG 751.8 Concrete Box Culverts


Bridge Standard Drawings
Box Culverts - BXC

751.5.6 Retaining Wall Sheets

Detailing Guidance
EPG 751.24 Retaining Walls


Bridge Standard Drawings
MSE Wall - MSEW

751.5.7 Temporary Bridge Sheets

Bridge Standard Drawings
Temporary Bridge


751.5.8 Miscellaneous Sheets

751.5.8.1 Bridge Approach Slab

Place the bridge approach slab sheet(s) before the bill of reinforcing steel sheet(s).

Detailing Guidance
EPG 751.10.5.1 Timber Header


Bridge Standard Drawings
Bridge Approach Slabs

751.5.8.2 Bill of Reinforcing Steel

Bridge Standard Drawings
Bill of Reinforcing Steel

751.5.8.3 As-Built Pile and Drilled Shaft Data

Place the as-built pile and drilled shaft data sheet(s) after the bill of reinforcing steel sheet(s).

Bridge Standard Drawings
As Built Pile Data
As Built Drilled Shaft Data

751.5.8.4 Boring Data

Instructions for Attaching Boring Log PDFs to Final Bridge Plans

Place the subsurface profile(s) at the end of the plans set. All subsurface profiles shall be reprinted without modifying any information.

751.5.8.4 Boring-01.png

The boring location note provided in EPG 751.50 E3 Miscellaneous shall be placed below the sheet title (Note E3.4). This note is already included on the Boring Data Standard Drawing.

Bridge Standard Drawings
Borings - BOR / Boring Template

751.5.8.5 Pedestrian Railing

Detailing Guidance
EPG 751.12.4 Chain Link Fence


Bridge Standard Drawings
(Fences-FEN)

751.5.8.6 Conduit

Detailing Guidance
EPG 751.10.4 Conduit Systems


751.5.9 Miscellaneous Details

751.5.9.1 Joint Filler

When joint filler is indicated on any sheet of the plans, the required type of joint filler shall be specified in either the detail or a note.

Types of Joint Filler, Sec 1057 Typical Application
Preformed Sponge Rubber Expansion and Partition Joint Filler Superstructure (except P/S panels), Pedestrian Structures and Retaining Walls
Preformed Fiber Expansion Joint Material Bridge Approach Slabs, Culverts, Slope Protection and P/S Panels

For bridges and retaining walls, preformed sponge rubber expansion and partition joint filler shall be specified in the General Notes, and therefore only details utilizing preformed fiber expansion joint material require identifying this type of joint filler.

751.5.9.1.jpg

751.5.9.2 Reinforcing Steel

Reinforcing Steel Table of Contents
1. General 2. Epoxy Coated 3. Available Sizes
4. Length Limits 5. Spacing Limits 6. Cover Limits
7. Length Calculations 8. Development and Lap Splices 9. Mechanical Bar Splices

751.5.9.2.1 Reinforcing Steel General

Unless otherwise specified, reinforcement shall be Grade 60 deformed bars, meeting the requirements of AASHTO M31, except that plain bars, deformed wire or plain wire may be used for spirals. Welded wire reinforcement shall be deformed when used as a substitute for deformed bars. Details for dimensioning reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Standard Practice.

751.5.9.2.1.1 Reinforcing Callouts

Dimensions and Leader Notes

All reinforcing steel that is included in a bill of reinforcing steel shall be specified in dimensions and leader notes using reinforcing callouts specifying both quantity and bar mark.

One of the two following formats shall be used for callouts:

Bars Placed Individually Bars Placed as Pairs
A-#B-CD A Pr.-#B-CD
Where:
A = quantity
B = bar size
C = descriptive letter
D = number

Omit quantity if only one bar or pair of bars is being specified. The abbreviation for pair(s) shall always be used for callouts.

The bar mark (#B-CD) consists of the bar size hyphenated with a bar designation (#6-H100).

Notes

Callouts are not used in notes. Instead, the quantity of bars (including if placed as pairs) shall be specified with the bar mark in accordance with EPG 751.5.1.1.10 and EPG 751.5.1.3. (Two pairs of #4-U100 bars …)

Bar Designation

Bar designation consists of a descriptive letter followed by a number typically unique to a desired shape or length. The following descriptive letter shall be used for the following locations.

A – Top & bottom slabs of box culverts
B – Walls of box culverts
C – Slip-forming bars in barriers
D – Culvert headwalls; dowel bars in intermediate bent keys; footings
E – Vertical bars at end of culvert wing walls
F – Culvert walls and slabs; corner and wing brace bars in end bents
G – Culvert wing walls
H – Horizontal bars in end bents, intermediate bents, concrete diaphragms, culvert slabs
J – L-shaped bars and top of wings in culverts
K – Type B, D & H barriers at end bents
M – Type C Barrier (except for required slip-forming bars)
P – Stirrup in columns, drilled shafts, & CIP piles
R – Type A, B, D & H Barriers (except for slip-forming bars & bars at end bents); culvert head walls
S – Slab
U – Stirrup bars in end bents, intermediate bents, and concrete diaphragms
V – Vertical bars in columns, drilled shafts, CIP piles, end bent beams, concrete diaphragm
W – Wire in a spiral for anchor bolt holes (and size starts with a W instead of “#”, e.g. “W5-W100”)

It is recommended to use 3 digits for the number designation (H100 instead of H10, for example) to allow for plenty of numbers for structures with a lot of different bars. Normally a 100 series would be used for End Bent No. 1 (or Unit 1 on a culvert), 200 series for Bent 2, etc. Exceptions are S bars in the slab, and C, K and R bars in barriers, which use one digit (S1, S2, S3, etc.).

751.5.9.2.1.2 Bend Shapes

Types:

There are two types of bend shapes: standard pin bend shapes and stirrup pin bend shapes.

Standard pin bend shapes are bent around standard pins and have a finished bend diameter in accordance with that specified on the bridge plans. Standard 90° and 180° hooks (used in development of bars) are bent around standard pins in accordance with the hook dimensions specified on the bridge plans.

Stirrup pin bend shapes are bent around stirrup pins and have a finished bend diameter in accordance with that specified on the bridge plans. Stirrup 90°, 135° and 180° hooks are bent around stirrup pins in accordance with the hook dimensions specified on the bridge plans. The stirrup 180° hooks of Shape 37S may be used instead of the standard 180° hooks when lapping the stirrup bars for shallow structures.

Shape Number:

There are 33 standard bend shapes shown with the Bill of Reinforcing Steel on every set of bridge plans. These bend shapes are specified by the numbers 6 thru 38. The letter “S” indicates the shape is a stirrup pin bend shape, otherwise the shape is a standard pin bend shape. Many of the legs of the standard shapes may be omitted as needed to create the required shape.

Seventeen of the standard shapes may be specified as either a standard pin bend shape or a stirrup pin bend shape (6, 8, 9,10, 11, 14, 15, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 28, 29, 30, 32 & 33). Ten of the standard shapes may only be specified as a standard pin bend shape (7, 12, 16, 17, 18, 20, 22, 26, 35 & 36). Six of the standard shapes may only be specified as a stirrup pin bend shape (13, 27, 31, 34, 37 & 38).

Non-standard shapes may be used when an unusual shape is required, and the shape can’t be obtained from one of the standard shapes. The bending diagram of non-standard shapes are added to the bill of reinforcing steel when required, starting with shape number 50.

Fabrication:

Shapes are fabricated in accordance with the latest version of the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, except fabricators shall use the finished bend diameters and hook dimensions specified on bridge plans. MoDOT deviates from CRSI as follows:

  • Use ACI’s finished bend diameter for #4 and #5 stirrup pin bend shapes (4d instead of CRSI’s 5d).
  • Dimension A or G is rounded up to next quarter-inch increment. (CRSI rounds to nearest inch increment for standard pin bend shapes and to nearest quarter-inch increment for stirrup pin bend shapes. CRSI’s rounding does not always provide the bar length needed for minimum extension of the hook).
  • Dimensions H and J are rounded to the nearest eighth-inch increment (instead of nearest quarter-inch increment).
  • Bar sizes 7 and 8 are not used in stirrup pin bend shapes.

751.5.9.2.2 Epoxy Coated Reinforcement Requirements

Reinforcement shall be uncoated bar unless otherwise noted.

Bridge Superstructure. All reinforcement in integral end bents shall be epoxy coated including CIP pile reinforcement but excluding drilled shaft reinforcement. All reinforcement in diaphragms, slab and barrier or railing shall be epoxy coated.

Non-Integral End Bents. All reinforcement shall be epoxy coated including CIP pile reinforcement but excluding drilled shaft reinforcement.

Intermediate Bents. When below an expansion device or when subject to spraying from adjacent roadways (15 feet or less from edge of shoulder), all reinforcement that is partially or entirely above ground shall be epoxy coated including CIP pile reinforcement but excluding drilled shaft reinforcement with greater than 3 inches of concrete cover. Coating of dowel bars shall be same as coating of intermediate bent reinforcement.

MSE Retaining Walls. When subject to spraying from adjacent roadways (15 feet or less from edge of shoulder), all panel and coping reinforcement shall be epoxy coated. The potential for future widening shall be considered. Epoxy coated reinforcement shall also be considered (regardless of location) where panels will be continuously wetted (around sources of water) and for structurally critical applications, such as containing necessary fill around structures.

Cast-In-Place Retaining Walls. When subject to spraying from adjacent roadways (15 feet or less from edge of shoulder), all reinforcement that is partially or entirely above ground shall be epoxy coated including CIP pile reinforcement but excluding drilled shaft reinforcement. The potential for future widening of adjacent roadway shall be considered.

Box Culverts. Epoxy coated reinforcement should be considered for fills 1 foot or less. Culverts located underneath heavily travelled roadways or sagging vertical curves are good candidates for use of epoxy. See the Structural Project Manager or Structural Liaison Engineer to determine the level of epoxy implementation (i.e. top slab only).

751.5.9.2.3 Available Sizes

751.5.9.2.3.1 Bar Sizes

For general use, reinforcement may range from #4 through #11 bars with restrictions as described for individual structural components. Number 14 and #18 bars shall not be used without the permission of the Structural Project Manager or Structural Liaison Engineer. Number 14 and #18 bars may be used in drilled shafts and rock sockets if #11 or small bars will not work.

751.5.9.2.3.2 Bar Support Heights

The height of all reinforcing bar supports shall be carried to the nearest 1/4". See Missouri Standard Plans Drawing 706.35 for details of bar supports.

751.5.9.2.4 Length Limits

Minimum length: Minimum reinforcement length shall be 2'-0", except for dowel bars and anchor bars.

Maximum length: Maximum reinforcement length shall be as follows:

Uncoated Reinforcement
#4 bars and larger 60'-0"
Epoxy Coated Reinforcement
#4 bars and larger 60'-0"

751.5.9.2.5 Spacing Limits

Reinforcement spacing shall be in accordance with LRFD 5.10.3, unless modified by the following criteria or elsewhere shown in the EPG.

Minimum Spacing - Moment Reinforcement
Preferred Min. - Footings 6" centers
Preferred Min. - Slabs, Culvert Walls and Retaining Walls 6" centers
Absolute Min. - Slabs, Culvert Walls and Retaining Walls 5” centers
Preferred Min. - All Other 4” centers
Absolute Min. 2 1/2” clear
Maximum Spacing - Moment Reinforcement
Absolute Max. - Slabs 1.5(slab thickness)
Absolute Max. - All Other 18"
Minimum Spacing - Shear Reinforcement
Absolute Min. - Substructure Beams (single stirrups) 5" centers
Absolute Min. - Substructure Beams (double Stirrups) 6" centers
Absolute Min. - Prestressed Slab Beams, Box Beams and I Girders 5" centers
Maximum Spacing - Shear Reinforcement
Absolute Max. - Substructure Beams 12" centers
Absolute Max. - Prestressed Slab Beams, Box Beams and I Girders Refer to EPG 751.22 P/S Concrete I Girders
Minimum Spacing - Longitudinal Compression Reinforcement
Absolute Min. 4 1/2" centers
Absolute Min. - Cols. (thru #10) 2" clear
Absolute Min. - Cols. (#11, #14) 2 1/2" clear
Absolute Min. - Cols (#18) 3 1/2” clear
For Drilled Shafts and Rock Sockets, see EPG 751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design.
Minimum Pitch - Spiral Reinforcement for Compression Members (Static)
For Columns, Drilled Shafts, Rock Sockets See LRFD
Minimum Spacing- Ties (Transverse) Reinforcement for Compression Members (Static)
For Columns See LRFD
For Drilled Shafts and Rock Sockets, see EPG 751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design. 6” centers for #4 bars
Maximum Spacing - Longitudinal Compression Reinforcement
Absolute Max. - the minimum number of longitudinal reinforcing bars shall be six for circular members and four for bars in a rectangular arrangement. For other requirements, see LRFD
Maximum Pitch - Spiral Reinforcement for Compression Members (Static)
Absolute Max. - Spirals 6” pitch
Maximum Spacing - Ties (Transverse) Reinforcement for Compression Members (Static)
Absolute Max. - Ties 12" centers
Minimum & Maximum Pitch- Spiral Reinforcement for Compression Members (Seismic)
See EPG 751.9 Bridge Seismic Design

751.5.9.2.6 Cover Limits

Situation Minimum Cover
Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth:
- primary reinforcement 3"
- stirrups, ties, spirals 2 1/2"
Conc. exposed to earth or weather:
- primary reinforcement 2"
- stirrups, ties, spirals 1 1/2"
Conc. slabs which have no positive corrosion protection:
- top reinforcement 3" *
- bottom reinforcement 1"
Conc. not exposed to weather or in contact with ground:
- primary reinforcement (thru #11) 1 1/2"
- stirrups, ties, spirals 1"
Conc. piles cast against or permanently exposed to earth 2"
* Absolute minimum cover shall be 2½ inches by LRFD 5.12.3.
The minimum cover for stirrup and tie steel shall be 1½ inches unless otherwise specified.
For minimum cover for drilled shafts and rock sockets, see EPG 751.37.6.1 Reinforcement Design.

751.5.9.2.7 Length Calculations

Lengths of individual legs of shaped reinforcing bars shall be out to out dimensions using ¼-inch increments and rounded as required to maintain clearances. Lengths of straight reinforcing bars shall be determined using one-inch increments and rounded down to maintain clearances or rounded up to achieve proper lap.

Nominal lengths, listed for fabricators use, is the summation of the individual out to out lengths. Actual lengths, listed for determining weight, is the length along the centerline of bar. Nominal and actual lengths shall be rounded to the nearest inch.

751.5.9.2.7.1 Standard Pin Bend Shapes (All Grades)

Hook Dimensions A or G and J:

Dimension A or G is rounded up to the next quarter-inch increment to insure adequate extension of hook.

Dimension J is rounded to the nearest eighth-inch increment.

Std Pin Bend Shapes 001.png
Bar Size d D r R 90° Hooks 180° Hooks
A or G C A or G J
#4 0.500" 3.00" 1.750" 2.000" 8" 5.498" 6" 4"
#5 0.625" 3.75" 2.188" 2.500" 10" 6.872" 7" 5"
#6 0.750" 4.50" 2.625" 3.000" 12" 8.247" 8¼" 6"
#7 0.875" 5.25" 3.063" 3.500" 14" 9.621" 9¾" 7"
#7ga 0.875" 7.00" 3.938" 4.375" 15" 12.370" 11½" 8¾"
#8 1.000" 6.00" 3.500" 4.000" 16" 10.996" 11" 8"
#8ga 1.000" 8.00" 4.500" 5.000" 17" 14.137" 13¼" 10"
#9 1.128" 9.50" 5.314" 5.878" 19½" 16.694" 15½" 11¾"
#10 1.270" 10.75" 6.010" 6.645" 22" 18.881" 17½" 13¼"
#11 1.410" 12.00" 6.705" 7.410" 24½" 21.064" 19½" 14⅞"
#14 1.693" 18.25" 9.972" 10.818" 31¼" 31.326" 27½" 21⅝"
#18 2.257" 24.00" 13.129" 14.257" 41½" 41.244" 36¼" 28½"
d = Bar diameter         D = Finished bend diameter
D = 6d, (#4 thru #8 epoxy or uncoated bars)
D = 8d, (#7 & #8 galvanized bars)
D = Values shown, (#9 thru #18)
r = radius to centerline of bar = D/2 + d/2         R = radius to outer edge of bar = r + d/2
a #7g & #8g represent galvanized bars.
   #7 & #8 represent uncoated and epoxy bars.
   All other sizes represent uncoated, epoxy and galvanized bars.

Bend Deductions:

Bend Deductions are provided in the table below. For 180° standard hooks the bend deduction is already included in the A or G dimension. Do not subtract the bend deduction from the A or G dimension for 180° standard hooks.

Bend deductions 001.png
Bar Size d D r R Bend Angle V = 30° Bend Angle V = 45° Bend Angle V = 60°
M C Deduct M C Deduct M C Deduct
#4 0.500" 3.00" 1.750" 2.000" 0.536" 0.916" 0.155" 0.828" 1.374" 0.282" 1.155" 1.833" 0.477"
#5 0.625" 3.75" 2.188" 2.500" 0.670" 1.145" 0.194" 1.036" 1.718" 0.353" 1.443" 2.291" 0.596"
#6 0.750" 4.50" 2.625" 3.000" 0.804" 1.374" 0.233" 1.243" 2.062" 0.424" 1.732" 2.749" 0.715"
#7 0.875" 5.25" 3.063" 3.500" 0.938" 1.604" 0.272" 1.450" 2.405" 0.494" 2.021" 3.207" 0.834"
#7ga 0.875" 7.00" 3.938" 4.375" 1.172" 2.062" 0.283" 1.812" 3.093" 0.532" 2.526" 4.123" 0.928"
#8 1.000" 6.00" 3.500" 4.000" 1.072" 1.833" 0.311" 1.657" 2.749" 0.565" 2.309" 3.665" 0.954"
#8ga 1.000" 8.00" 4.500" 5.000" 1.340" 2.356" 0.323" 2.071" 3.534" 0.608" 2.887" 4.712" 1.061"
#9 1.128" 9.50" 5.314" 5.878" 1.575" 2.782" 0.368" 2.435" 4.174" 0.696" 3.394" 5.565" 1.223"
#10 1.270" 10.75" 6.010" 6.645" 1.781" 3.147" 0.414" 2.752" 4.720" 0.785" 3.836" 6.294" 1.379"
#11 1.410" 12.00" 6.705" 7.410" 1.986" 3.511" 0.460" 3.069" 5.266" 0.873" 4.278" 7.021" 1.535"
#14 1.693" 18.25" 9.972" 10.818" 2.899" 5.221" 0.576" 4.481" 7.832" 1.130" 6.246" 10.442" 2.049"
#18 2.257" 24.00" 13.129" 14.257" 3.820" 6.874" 0.766" 5.905" 10.311" 1.500" 8.231" 13.748" 2.714"
Bar Size Bend Angle V = 90° Bend Angle V = 120° Bend Angle V = 135° Bend Angle V = 150°
M C Deduct M C Deduct M C Deduct M C Deduct
#4 2.000" 2.749" 1.251" 3.464" 3.665" 3.263" 4.828" 4.123" 5.534" 7.464" 4.581" 10.347"
#5 2.500" 3.436" 1.564" 4.330" 4.581" 4.079" 6.036" 5.154" 6.917" 9.330" 5.727" 12.933"
#6 3.000" 4.123" 1.877" 5.196" 5.498" 4.895" 7.243" 6.185" 8.300" 11.196" 6.872" 15.520"
#7 3.500" 4.811" 2.189" 6.062" 6.414" 5.710" 8.450" 7.216" 9.684" 13.062" 8.018" 18.107"
#7ga 4.375" 6.185" 2.565" 7.578" 8.247" 6.909" 10.562" 9.278" 11.847" 16.328" 10.308" 22.347"
#8 4.000" 5.498" 2.502" 6.928" 7.330" 6.526" 9.657" 8.247" 11.067" 14.928" 9.163" 20.693"
#8ga 5.000" 7.069" 2.931" 8.660" 9.425" 7.896" 12.071" 10.603" 13.539" 18.660" 11.781" 25.540"
#9 5.878" 8.347" 3.409" 10.181" 11.130" 9.232" 14.191" 12.521" 15.861" 21.937" 13.912" 29.962"
#10 6.645" 9.440" 3.850" 11.509" 12.587" 10.432" 16.042" 14.161" 17.924" 24.799" 15.734" 33.865"
#11 7.410" 10.532" 4.288" 12.834" 14.043" 11.626" 17.889" 15.798" 19.980" 27.654" 17.554" 37.755"
#14 10.818" 15.663" 5.973" 18.737" 20.884" 16.590" 26.117" 23.495" 28.739" 40.373" 26.105" 54.641"
#18 14.257" 20.622" 7.892" 24.694" 27.496" 21.891" 34.419" 30.933" 37.906" 53.208" 34.370" 72.045"
d = Bar diameter         D = Finished bend diameter
D = 6d, (#4 thru #8 epoxy or uncoated bars)
D = 8d, (#7 & #8 galvanized bars)
D = Values shown, (#9 thru #18)
Deduct = 2M – C    (All angles)                                  Deduct = 2R – C    (90° only)
M = R(Tan V/2)       (All angles)                                  M = R                     (90° only)
r = radius to centerline of bar = D/2 + d/2                   R = radius to outer edge of bar = r + d/2
a #7g & #8g represent galvanized bars.
   #7 & #8 represent uncoated and epoxy bars.
   All other sizes represent uncoated, epoxy and galvanized bars.

Example Length Calculations for a Standard Pin Bend Shape:

Epoxy #7 standard shape with two 90° bends:
180° Hook A = 9¾" 1st table
Shape12 example.png
B = 2'-6"
C = 2'-0"
D =   23"  
Nominal Length = 7'-2¾" = 7'-3" *
90° Bend Deducts = - 2(2.189") 2nd table
Actual Length = 6'-10.372"= 6'-10" *
* Rounded to nearest inch
751.5.9.2.7.2 Stirrup Pin Bend Shapes (All Grades)

Hook Dimensions A or G, H and J:

Dimension A or G is rounded up to the next quarter-inch increment to insure adequate extension of hook.

Dimensions H and J are rounded to the nearest eighth-inch increment.

Stirrup Pin Bend Shapes 001.png
Bar Size d D r R 90° Hooks 135° Hooks 180° Hooks
A or G C A or G H C A or G J
#4 0.500" 2.00" 1.2500" 1.500" 4½" 2.945" 4½" 2⅞" 3.927" 5" 3"
#4ga 0.500" 3.00" 1.7500" 2.000" 5" 4.123" 5¼" 3" 5.498" 6" 4"
#5 0.625" 2.50" 1.5625" 1.875" 5¾" 3.682" 5¾" 3⅝" 4.909" 5¾" 3¾"
#5ga 0.625" 3.75" 2.1875" 2.500" 6¼" 5.154" 6½" 3⅞" 6.872" 7" 5"
#6 0.750" 4.50" 2.6250" 3.000" 12" 6.185" 7¾" 4⅝" 8.247" 8¼" 6"
d = Bar diameter
D = Finished bend diameter
D = 4d, (#4 & #5 epoxy or uncoated bars)
D = 6d, (#4 &5 galvanized bars & #6 bars)                H = R – ½ D (sin 45°) + 6d (sin 45°)
r = radius to outer edge of bar D/2 + d/2                    R = radius to outer edge of bar = r + d/2
a #4g & #5g represent galvanized bars.
   #4 & #5 represent uncoated and epoxy bars.
   #6 represent uncoated, epoxy and galvanized bars.

Bend Deductions:

Bend Deductions are provided in the table below. For 135° and 180° stirrup hooks the bend deduction is already included in the A or G dimension. Do not subtract the bend deduction from the A or G dimension for 135° and 180° stirrup hooks.

Stirrup Pin Bend Shapes 002.png
Bar Size d D r R Bend Angle V = 30° Bend Angle V = 45° Bend Angle V = 60°
M C Deduct M C Deduct M C Deduct
#4 0.500" 2.00" 1.250" 1.500" 0.402" 0.654" 0.149" 0.621" 0.982" 0.261" 0.866" 1.309" 0.423"
#4ga 0.500" 3.00" 1.750" 2.000" 0.536" 0.916" 0.155" 0.828" 1.374" 0.282" 1.155" 1.833" 0.477"
#5 0.625" 2.50" 1.563" 1.875" 0.502" 0.818" 0.187" 0.777" 1.227" 0.326" 1.083" 1.636" 0.529"
#5ga 0.625" 3.75" 2.188" 2.500" 0.670" 1.145" 0.194" 1.036" 1.718" 0.353" 1.443" 2.291" 0.596"
#6 0.750" 4.50" 2.625" 3.000" 0.804" 1.374" 0.233" 1.243" 2.062" 0.424" 1.732" 2.749" 0.715"
Bar Size Bend Angle V = 90° Bend Angle V = 120° Bend Angle V = 135° Bend Angle V = 150°
R C Deduct M C Deduct M C Deduct M C Deduct
#4 1.500" 1.963" 1.037" 2.598" 2.618" 2.578" 3.621" 2.945" 4.297" 5.598" 3.272" 7.924"
#4ga 2.000" 2.749" 1.251" 3.464" 3.665" 3.263" 4.828" 4.123" 5.534" 7.464" 4.581" 10.347"
#5 1.875" 2.454" 1.296" 3.248" 3.272" 3.223" 4.527" 3.682" 5.372" 6.998" 4.091" 9.905"
#5ga 2.500" 3.436" 1.564" 4.330" 4.581" 4.079" 6.036" 5.154" 6.917" 9.330" 5.727" 12.933"
#6 3.000" 4.123" 1.877" 5.196" 5.498" 4.895" 7.243" 6.185" 8.300" 11.196" 6.872" 15.520"
d = Bar diameter         D = Finished bend diameter
D = 4d, (#4 & #5 epoxy or uncoated bars)
D = 6d, (#4 &5 galvanized bars & #6 bars)
Deduct = 2M – C    (All angles)                                  Deduct = 2R – C    (90° only)
M = R(Tan V/2)       (All angles)                                  M = R                     (90° only)
r = radius to centerline of bar = D/2 + d/2                   R = radius to outer edge of bar = r + d/2
a #4g & #5g represent galvanized bars.
   #4 & #5 represent uncoated and epoxy bars.
   #6 represent uncoated, epoxy and galvanized bars.

Example Length Calculations for a Stirrup Pin Bend Shape:

Uncoated #4 stirrup with two 90° bends:
135° Hooks A & G = 2(4½") 1st table
Shape31S example.png
B = 2'-6"
C = 3'-0"
D =   2'-6"  
Nominal Length = 8'-9"
90° Bend Deducts = - 2(1.037") 2nd table
Actual Length = 8'-6.926"= 8'-7" *
* Rounded to nearest inch

751.5.9.2.8 Development and Lap Splices

Development and Lap Splice Table of Contents
1. General
2. Development and Lap Splices of Deformed Bars in Tension
3. Development and Lap Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression
4. Development of Standard Hooked Deformed Bars in Tension
751.5.9.2.8.1 Development and Lap Splice General

Development of Tension Reinforcement

Development lengths for tension reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.2.1.

Excess reinforcement modification factor (λer) of LRFD 5.10.8.2.1c shall only be used in situations where development length without this factor is difficult to attain. All other modification factors shall be used.

Temperature and shrinkage reinforcement are assumed to fully develop the specified yield stresses. Therefore the development length shall not be reduced by λer .

Development lengths for tension reinforcement have been tabulated on the following pages and include the modification factors except as described above.

Lap Splices of Tension Reinforcement

Lap splice lengths for tension reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.4.2a and 5.10.8.4.3a. Class B splices are preferred when possible, however it is permissible to use Class A when physical space is limited and Class A requirements are met. It should be noted that "required by analysis" of the Class A requirements is based on the stress encountered at the splice location, which is not necessarily the maximum stress used to design the reinforcement. Lap splice lengths for tension reinforcement have been tabulated on the following pages and include the development length modification factors as described above.

Development of Tension Hooks

Development lengths of tension hooks shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.2.4.

Modification factors for reinforcement confinement (λrc2) and excess reinforcement (λer) of LRFD 5.10.8.2.4b shall only be used in situations where development length without these factors is difficult to attain. All other modification factors shall be used.

Development lengths of tension hooks have been tabulated on the following pages and include the modification factors except as described above.

Development of Compression Reinforcement

Development lengths for compression reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.2.2.

Excess reinforcement modification factor (λer) of LRFD 5.10.8.2.2b shall only be used in situations where development length without this factor is difficult to attain. All other modification factors shall be used.

Development lengths for compression reinforcement have been tabulated on the following pages and include the modification factors except as described above.

Lap Splices of Compression Reinforcement

Lap splices lengths for compression reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with LRFD 5.10.8.4.2a and 5.10.8.4.5a.

Splice lengths for compression reinforcement have been tabulated on the following pages.

751.5.9.2.8.2 Development and Lap Splices of Deformed Bars in Tension

The values in the following table are based on Grade 60 bars and may be adjusted for yield strengths up to 100 ksi. The final step in the table adjusts values for other material strengths. The values for Grade 40 bars are 40/60 of the values in the table (not less than 12 in.), and values for 100 ksi bars are 100/60 of the values in the table.

751.5.9.2.7.2 step 1 through 5.jpg
751.5.9.2.7.2 step 6 2023.jpg
751.5.9.2.7.2 step 7 2023.jpg
751.5.9.2.8.3 Development and Lap Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression

The values in the following table are based on Grade 60 bars. Development lengths may be adjusted for yield strengths up to 100 ksi. Lap splice lengths for yield strengths greater than 60 ksi up to 100 ksi shall be calculated in accordance LRFD 5.10.8.4.5a. The final step in the table adjusts values for other material strengths. The values for Grade 40 bars are 40/60 of the values in the table (not less than 8 in. for development length and 12 in. for lap splice length).

751.5.9.2.7.3.jpg
751.5.9.2.8.4 Development of Standard Hooked Deformed Bars in Tension

The development length (Ldh) is measured from the critical section to the outside edge of the hook.

The values in the following table are based on Grade 60 bars and may be adjusted for yield strengths up to 100 ksi. The final step in the table adjusts values for other material strengths. The values for Grade 40 bars are 40/60 of the values in the table (not less than 8db, 6 in. or ldh-edge), and values for 100 ksi bars are 100/60 of the values in the table.

751.5.9.2.7.4 steps 1-5 2023.jpg
751.5.9.2.7.4 steps 6 and 7.jpg

751.5.9.2.9 Mechanical Bar Splices

Mechanical Bar Splice Example Details
751.5.9.2.9.1 General

Mechanical bar splices (MBS) may be used in situations where it is not possible or practical to use lap splices. Sec 706 and Sec 710 require contractors to provide certification that MBS systems meet the yield requirement for overstrength of LRFD 5.10.8.4.2b and therefore there is no design required for these systems. However practical design may require specificity of a particular type of MBS, i.e. a device for restrictive applications determined on a case-by-case basis. See Structural Project Manager or Structural Liaison Engineer.

751.5.9.2.9.2 Details

MBS shall be shown at all locations where required and contrasted to distinguish them from the reinforcing bars. MBS locations shall identify a unique combination of bar marks. Identifying combination and quantity shall follow standard detailing practice, e.g. 6-MBS H106-H104 or MBS H106-H104 (Typ.). Space limitations on plans may require use of footnotes. MBS shall be specified as shown indicating bar marks to be spliced.

751.5.9.2.8.2 details.jpg

Exception: MBS for bridge approach slabs shall be specified generally since bars are not uniquely identified. Good detailing practice requires that construction joints and estimated quantities of MBS systems be shown. The standard drawings for bridge approach slabs shall be modified to show staged construction.

751.5.9.2.8.2 section bb.jpg
751.5.9.2.9.3 Estimated Quantities

If the overall quantity of mechanical bar splices required for a structure is 50 or greater not including any required in bridge approach slabs, then mechanical bar splices will be paid for separately and shown in all quantities tables otherwise their cost shall be covered by the contract unit price for other items.

MBS that are required in bridge approach slabs will not be directly paid for but instead the cost will be considered completely covered by the contract unit price for the bridge approach slab.

751.5.9.2.9.4 Notes

See EPG 751.50 A3 for appropriate note and guidance for use.

751.5.9.3 Structural Steel

Structural Steel Table of Contents
1. Welding 2. Notch Toughness 3. Fracture Control Plan

751.5.9.3.1 Welding

751.5.9.3.1.1 General

All welding shall be detailed in accordance with ANSI / AASHTO / AWS D1.5, Bridge Welding Code.

The following chart shows the suggested minimum weld sizes. However, these may be increased to satisfy design requirements.

Minimum Fillet Weld Material thickness of thicker part joined
1/4" t" 3/4"
5/16" 3/4" < t 2 1/2"
1/2" t > 2 1/2"

The factored resistance of a welded connection is governed by the resistance of the base metal or the deposited weld metal.

The factored resistance of the base metal is:

Rr = φv(0.58AgFy)

Where:

φv = 1.0 (Resistance factor for shear)
Ag = gross area of smaller connection element
Fy= specified minimum yield strength of connection element

Allowable shear load of the base metal = RrAg

The factored resistance of the deposited weld metal is:

Rr = 0.6φe2Fexx

Where:

φe2 = 0.8 (Resistance factor for fillet weld material)
Fexx = tensile strength of electrode classification.

Allowable Shear Loads for Fillet Welds = (Rr)(0.707)(weldsize)

Size of Fillet Weld (Inch) Allowable Factored Shear Loads For Fillet Welds *(kips per linear inch)
1/4 5.939
5/16 7.424
3/8 8.908
1/2 11.878
5/8 14.847
3/4 17.816
7/8 20.786
1 23.755
* based on Fexx = 70 ksi
751.5.9.3.1.2 Minimum Length of Fillet Weld

The minimum effective length of a fillet weld shall be four times its size and in no case less than 1½ inches.

751.5.9.3.1.3 Maximum Sizes of Fillet Welds
751.5.9.3.1.3.jpg


751.5.9.3.1.4 Standard Welding Symbols and Application of Symbols
751.5.9.3.1.4.1.jpg
751.5.9.3.1.4.2.jpg
* Normally not used except for flush or upset welds
751.5.9.3.1.4.3.jpg
751.5.9.3.1.4.4.jpg
751.5.9.3.1.4.5.jpg
751.5.9.3.1.4.6.jpg
751.5.9.3.1.4.7.jpg
751.5.9.3.1.4.8.jpg
751.5.9.3.1.4.9.jpg
751.5.9.3.1.4.10.jpg
751.5.9.3.1.4.11.jpg
751.5.9.3.1.4.12.jpg
751.5.9.3.1.4.13.jpg
751.5.9.3.1.4.14.jpg



751.5.9.3.2 Notch Toughness

Wide Flange Beam Structures: Proper notes to be placed on plans.

Plate Girder Structures: Proper notes to be placed on plans. Typical examples for location of *** on plans for tension flange only of plate girders are shown below.

751.5.9.3.2.jpg

Other special locations for *** will be for tension flanges of floor beams in straight girder bridges, and for top and bottom flanges of floor beams in curved girder bridges.

When any splices are located in a moment area, all flange and web splice plates for the bridge are subject to notch toughness requirements. Show *** with detail of flange splice plate.

751.5.9.3.3 Fracture Control Plan (FCP)

Fracture Control Plan (FCP), Section 12 of ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5-95, Bridge Welding Code, shall apply to fracture critical non-redundant member.

Main elements and components whose failure is expected to cause the collapse of the bridge shall be designated as failure-critical, and the associated structural system as non-redundant. Examples of non-redundant members are flange and web plates in one or two girder bridges, main one-element truss members and hanger plates.

For non-redundant steel structures or members, the designer shall determine which, if any, component is a Fracture Critical Member (FCM). The location of all FCMs shall be clearly delineated on the design plans.

FCMs are defined as tension members or tension components of bending members (including those subject to reversal of stress), the failure of which would be expected to result in collapse of the bridge. The designation "FCM" shall mean fracture critical member or member component. Members and components that are not subject to tension stress under any condition of live load are not fracture critical.

Any attachment welded to a tension zone of an FCM shall be considered an FCM when any dimension of the attachment exceeds 4 inches in the direction parallel to the calculated tensile stress in the FCM. Attachments designated FCM shall meet all requirements of FCP. All welds to FCMs shall be considered fracture critical and shall conform to the requirements of FCP. Welds to compression members or the compression area of bending members are not fracture critical.

FCMs shall be fabricated in accordance with FCP. Material for FCM shall be tested in accordance with AASHTO T243 (ASTM A673), Frequency P. Material for components not designed as fracture critical shall be tested in conformance with AASHTO T243 (ASTM A673), Frequency H. Sec 712 and FCM Special Provisions will include additional requirement for material, welding, inspection and manufacturing.

Notes EPG 751.50 Miscellaneous A5.1 and H1.23b Structural Steel for Wide Flange Beams and Plate Girder Structures shall be placed on contract plans as required.